Home

NetDVMS NVR 6.5f Manual Click Here

1. Notification Area Shortcut Menu By right clicking the NetMatrix icon in Windows notification area you get access to another shortcut menu Show Window Config Exit 211 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual NetMatrix Monitor The shortcut menu has the following options Show Window Restores the NetMatrix Monitor window in either regular or full screen view depending on configuration Config Lets you access the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window Note that before the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window opens you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor Exit Shuts down the NetMatrix Monitor application Note that before the application closes you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor A shut down NetMatrix Monitor application can be started again by double clicking the NetMatrix Monitor shortcut on your desktop Shutting Down the NetMatrix Monitor Application Closing the NetMatrix Monitor window by clicking the close button in the NetMatrix Monitor window s title bar will not in itself shut down NetMatrix Monitor application it will merely send the window into hidden mode To shut down NetMatrix Monitor application do the following 1 Right click the NetMatrix icon in Windows notification area also known as the system tray typically located in the bott
2. 139 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output How to How to Add an nput based Event Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc Several types of events exist See About Input Events amp Output In the following you will see how to define events based on input received from external input units such as sensors attached to doors windows etc connected to cameras or other devices on a NetDVMS system To add an input based event do the following 1 Inthe Administrator window click the I O Setup button This will open the I O Setup window 2 In the I O Setup window first select the camera or other device to which the input unit is connected then click the Add new event button ido nn Ue ever AA A a r hara el This will open the Add New Event window Note Some cameras devices are capable of handling one input event only others are capable of handling several input events The content of the Add New Event window varies accordingly For simplicity reasons the following steps will describe adding an event on a camera device capable of handling one input event only 3 Inthe Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only the External
3. When you click OK in the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events the selected input event is automatically transferred from Available Input Event s list to the Enabled Input Event s list Lets you move an input event selected in the Enabled Input Event s list to the Available Input Event s list thus disabling it Lets you edit the settings for an input event selected in the Enabled Input Event s list 112 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Add New Event Window The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events lets you specify the settings for a particular input event on devices capable of handling several input events Bald thew Feet ka pl lari ea Ted HI f he eed ca cmoa The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events Access You access the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events by clicking the gt gt button in the Multiple Input Events window Note Before you specify input events for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are Supported for the device and firmware used Add New Event Window s Fields The Add
4. e Enable speedup NetDVMS is able to increase the frame rate of a camera if motion is detected or if an event occurs Select the check box to enable increased frame rate on motion detection or on an event then specify the required conditions in the following fields Grip In the Camera Alert Scheduler window you can specify periods in which the camera should always speedup o On motion Available only if the Enable speedup check box is selected Select this check box to use a higher frame rate when motion is detected Remember to specify the required higher frame rate in the Speedup settings section The camera will return to the original frame rate two seconds after the last motion is detected o On event Available only if the Enable speedup check box is selected Select the check box to use a higher frame rate when an event occurs and until another event occurs then select required start and stop events in the Start and Stop lists The camera will increase its frame rate when the start event occurs and return to the original frame rate when the stop event occurs Remember to specify the required higher frame rate in the Speedup settings section Note Use of speedup on event requires that events have been defined in the O Setup window accessed by clicking the I O Setup button in the Administrator window e When to store images in the database Select when video received from the camera should be stored in the dat
5. Installation If you wish to install configure and run NetDVMS on a Windows Vista computer it is important that you have administrator rights If you only have standard user rights you will not be able to configure the surveillance system The restrictions are applied by the so called User Account Control a security component in Windows Vista Note however that it is possible to disable User Account Control For more information search www microsoft com for Vista User Account Control or similar Note Do not install NetDVMS on a mounted drive i e a drive attached to an empty folder on an NTFS NT File System volume with a label or name instead of a drive letter If using mounted drives critical system features may not work as intended you will for example not receive any warnings if the system runs out of diSk Space Prerequisites Shut down any existing software If upgrading read Upgrading from a Previous Version first 1 Insert the NetDVMS software DVD wait for a short while select required language then click the Install NetDVMS link Alternatively if you are installing a version downloaded from the internet run the downloaded installation file from the location you have saved it to Grip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software or similar When this is the case click the Run button 2 When th
6. Recorder Managed E Recording Server nuria Fans Cans IMPORTANT While the Recording Server service is paused no video or audio will be available neither for live viewing nor for recording Resuming the Recording Server Service When the service is paused the Service Manager window closes The next time you open it the Pause button will have changed to Resume Simply click the Resume button to resume the Recording Server service Recorder Managed Recording Server pisa Resume Cinca Grip The service is automatically resumed when you exit the Administrator application What to Do if the Recording Server Service is Stopped If the Service Manager window informs you that the recording server is stopped the Recording Server service has been stopped as opposed to paused outside the Administrator application You are able to start a stopped Recording Server service through the Recording Server Manager 166 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Scheduling The Camera Alert Scheduler window lets you specify when each camera should be online A camera is online when it is transferring video to the NetDVMS server for processing IMPORTANT The fact that a camera Is online i e transferring video to the NetDVMS server will not necessarily mean that video from the camera is recorded i e stored in the camera s database on the NetDVMS server Image storage settings f
7. The window furthermore features a number of buttons for use when adding and configuring the events Add new Used for defining input events on the device selected in the Defined event events list Depending on the type of device you may be able to define one or more input events on the device Some devices do not support input output at all Refer to the release notes for device specific information Devices Capable of Handling One Input Event Only If the device is capable of handling one input event only the button will open the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only in which you define the input event and any e mail or SMS alerts to be associated with it If you have already defined an input event on a device capable of handling one input event only the Add new event button will not be available when the device is selected in the Defined events list 105 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Button Description Add new output event Add VMD Event Motion Detection However if you click the plus sign next to the device in the Defined events list and select the defined input event the Add new event button becomes available for defining timer events see Timer Events in the following Devices Capable of Handling Several I nput Events If the device is capable of handling more than one input event the but
8. When extraction is done the folder to which you extracted will contain a small number of files among these a file with the extension msi The msi file is a Microsoft Windows Installer installation package covering the complete NetGuard EVS installation procedure 3 You can now use your systems management tool to deploy the msi file Alternatively you can simply copy the msi file to required computers and run the msi file from a command prompt Ocularis Client Lite Ocularis Client Lite also provides remote users with extremely feature rich access to the surveillance system Grip See system requirements for Ocularis Client Lite under System Requirements Ocularis Client Lite must be installed locally on the remote user s computer Installing Ocularis Client Lite Ocularis Client Lite can be installed in three ways e Download and Install Ocularis Client Lite from the surveillance system server e Install Ocularis Client Lite from the NetDVMS software DVD e Silent Installation Surveillance System Administrators Only Removing Ocularis Client Lite Use Windows Control Panel Add or Remove Programs to remove Ocularis Client Lite iWhere can I find more information about Ocularis Client Lite Once installed Ocularis Client Lite has its own built in help system Alternatively refer to the Ocularis Client Lite User s Manual available on the NetDVMS software DVD Installation Typically you download Ocularis Client Lite from
9. lt gt OnSs IP To The Core NetDVMS 6 5f Network Video Recorder User Manual On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI One Blue Hill Plaza 7th Floor P O Box 1555 Pearl River NY 10965 P 845 732 7900 T 845 732 7900 info onssi com www onssi com On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Welcome Table Of Contents WELCOME 0000 2 vera eet A A RC PEE OES oP VER aN 9 SEVERAL TARGETED COMPONENTS IN ONE escescecceceecescecceceecnscuccecnscnscaceeenscnsceesenseusceeeeensensceeneees 9 NAVIGATING THE BUILT IN HELP SYSTEM 2cccecececcccccccncececececenencnceccencenencncsesenceneneneseneeneneneees 10 COTS ALS IEE lett A iss eta A ol al ae a ae ne aa 10 SSCA el rye eh E EAEN ee Ne A Sh te Cats ARE nk SR A 10 LINKS IN FIEER TOPES aaa 10 PRINTING HELP TOP OS died 11 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 0 ua 12 NetDVMS Surveillance System Server ccccccccccccssssssssececeeeeeeeceseueasesseseeeeeeeesseasaueesseeeeeeeeeeseseaseaseegegeseeeseeeeesenseees 12 Nau ES A uate celewha thes vedio cece A EEST E ES E ES EE 13 OC Haris Clin e e ad a ed a e cate aearece 13 NA e a 13 NetPDA NetG avr as dida 14 AIN O E 15 A PPP AR 15 INSTALLATION osas 18 UPGRADIN Gui as 19 POIS a S A E 19 Backing Up Your Current Configurati i idas 19 Removing Me CUTE VEO Mad E aa E ae a a 20 fac A Ea 20 Restoring a Configuration Backup if Required oocccccccccocicicicinicnenenenennnencnonnnnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnononnnnnn
10. Backing Up Your Current Configuration It is generally a good idea to make regular backups of your server configuration as a disaster recovery measure Upgrading your server is no exception While it is rare to lose your configuration cameras schedules views etc it can happen under certain circumstances Luckily it takes only a minute to back up your existing configuration 1 Create a folder called Backup on the desktop of your NetDVMS server on a network drive or on removable media 2 Open My Computer and navigate to the NetDVMS installation folder 3 Copy the following files and folders into your Backup folder e All configuration ini files e All scheduling sch files e The file users txt not found in most installations 19 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Installation e Folders with a name ending in ViewGroups Note that the folders may not exist if upgrading from old software versions Removing the Current Version NetDVMS versions 6 0a or later can automatically be removed during installation of the new version When installing the new version simply answer Yes if asked if you accept such automatic removal The automatic removal will not delete any existing recordings or configuration NetDVMS versions older than 6 0 as well as lower products in the product portfolio must be removed manually before installing the new version Manually removing the old version involves removi
11. Several types of events exist see About Input Events amp Output In most cases events occur and actions are triggered without the need for human intervention by NetDVMS users System administrators define the criteria for each event for example a certain amount of detected motion or input from a specific sensor when the criteria are met the system interprets it as an event and automatically triggers the required actions However you may also want users to be able to manually force an event to occur For this purpose NetDVMS lets you define event buttons Event buttons let users manually trigger events from NetGuard EVS In NetGuard EVS event buttons are actually not buttons instead users manually trigger events by selecting them from a list See also About Event Buttons for examples of the many ways in which you can use event buttons To add an event button do the following 1 Inthe Administrator window click the Event Buttons button This will open the Event Buttons window 2 Inthe Event Buttons window first select the camera or other device for which you want the event button to be available then click the Add new event button Note that you are also able to make the event button globally available i e available to users regardless of which camera device they have selected in NetGuard EVS To make the event button globally available simply select Global at the top of the list instead of a particular camera devi
12. The Download Manager is removed separately from the NetDVMS software 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs 2 Inthe Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select Download Manager 3 Click the Remove button The Download Manager lets you manage which NetDVMS related features your organization s users will be able to access from a targeted welcome page on the surveillance system server Access You access the Download Manager from Windows Start menu Select All Programs gt NVR Download Manager gt NVR Download Manager Examples of User Accessible Features e With a standard browser users connect to the surveillance server where they are presented with a welcome page From the welcome page users can download OnSSI client software and install it on their computers 252 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to e Language packs which let users add additional language versions to their existing clients Users download such language packs from the welcome page e Users can connect to welcome page and log in to NetGuard which simply runs ina browser without any need for software installation e Various plugins Downloading such plugins can be relevant for users if your organization uses add on products with NetDVMS What Does the Welcome Page Look Like The welcome page Is a simple web page with links to downloading or ru
13. When ready click OK This will return you to the Generic Events window In the Generic Events window your newly defined event is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the Generic item to see the listing E Grado Coals Li ra rd Click OK to close the Generic Event window and return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the generic event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS Grip See also How to Test a Generic Event Once you have added a generic event see How to Add a Generic Event a quick and easy way to test your generic event is to first set up an event notification and then use Telnet to send a small amount of data which will trigger the generic event and in turn the event notification What is Telnet Telnet is a terminal emulation program used on TCP IP networks With Telnet you can connect to a server from a computer on the network and execute commands through Telnet as if you were entering them directly on the server Windows includes a client for use with Telnet For this example we have created a generic event called Video Our generic event simply specifies that if the term video appears in a received TCP data package the generic event should be triggered Your generic event may be different but you can still use the principles outlined in the following 1 In the Administrator window fi
14. Your configuration options depend on whether the PTZ camera in question is of the absolute positioning or relative positioning kind e Absolute For an absolute positioning PTZ camera you are able to define up to 50 preset positions You define a preset position by moving the PTZ camera to the required position with the controls in the PTZ View section then naming the position in the window s Preset Positions section e Relative For a relative positioning PTZ camera the number of preset positions will depend on the camera video encoder and PTZ driver used For some relative positioning PTZ cameras you will only be able to use preset positions defined on the camera video encoder itself when this is the case the preset positions are typically defined through the camera video server s built in web page For relative positioning PTZ cameras allowing definition of preset positions through the NetDVMS system you define a preset position by moving the PTZ camera to the required position with the controls in the PTZ View section then naming the position in the window s Preset Positions section 55 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output How to Define a Preset Position To define a preset position do the following Note Some PTZ cameras of the relative positioning kind do not allow you to define preset positions as described in the following for such cameras you should define p
15. Device Port Port Address Name used to identify the selected camera Existing names such as the default camera names Camera 1 Camera 2 etc can be changed by overwriting the existing names Note Camera names must be unique for each device Users of the NetGuard EVS can take advantage of a range of keyboard shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify each camera Camera shortcut numbers must be unique for each camera must not contain any letters or special characters and must be no longer than eight digits Examples of correct camera shortcut numbers 3 12345678 Examples of incorrect camera shortcut numbers A 3 123456789 Note Camera shortcut numbers are only used in the NetGuard EVS In other applications such as the NetGuard the camera shortcuts cannot be used Grip You can also assign shortcut numbers to cameras in the Camera Name and Number window Grip More information about using the keyboard shortcuts is available in the documentation for the NetGuard EVS Lets you select whether the camera on the selected camera channel Is Fixed or Moveable e Fixed Camera mounted in a fixed position e Moveable PTZ camera Available only if Moveable is selected in the Camera Type field Lets you select which control port on the video encoder should be used for controlling PTZ functionality on the camera Availa
16. Inthe Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Outputs button Cia Sat Viet de Mi Carrera 1 El ASPE HS LAA eg Dauner ber oe F ja elh ee s C help rd Ars ma da woe aE o las il pe Banai haundie o Fi inte pe mmi F crete be ee Fi ee mF an in prp rg n a egn dira 5 ijr iir up on PE i atras Benen debe pb brar mnr er pl T ere Deia ero A a dedo pro is an db g Sd Dr an beeen nhier Bhar oper ol daa ee ii he Peder ete ee dde E Ml ina at A wara This will open the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 7 Inthe All Outputs list in the window s left side select the required output then click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list F iiag tar Stairs Camara 1 Ha Seen Diil lao dardo This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list which lists all outputs to be automatically triggered when motion is detected by the camera Good to know You are not limited to selecting output connected to the camera itself If output has been defined on other cameras devices on the NetDVMS system this output will also be selectable in the All Outputs list e An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way 157 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output e The Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window also lets you select output for manual tr
17. NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Button Description Check Box The selected preset position is moved one step per click By moving preset position up or down you are able to control the sequence in which available preset positions are presented in OnSSI clients In NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard EVS users may select preset positions from a list By moving a preset position up or down in the Preset Positions section s list you can thus determine the sequence in which preset positions are presented In an OnSSI client s list Preset Position on Events Section If you have specified events event or generic events you are able to make the PTZ camera automatically go to particular preset positions when particular events occur To configure the use of preset positions on events click the Setup button This will open the Event window for preset positions on event in which you are able to associate particular preset positions with particular events To use preset positions on event select the Goto preset on event check box Patrolling Section To configure PTZ patrolling the automatic movement of a PTZ camera between several preset positions click the Setup button to go to the Setup PTZ Patrolling window PTZ patrolling requires that at least two preset positions have been defined 59 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Event Windo
18. or disconnect from a video feed from a particular camera As part of the configuration your NetMatrix Monitor application may have been set up to automatically accept all received commands in which case new video feeds will automatically be displayed in your NetMatrix Monitor window If your NetMatrix Monitor has not been set up to automatically accept all received commands you will be prompted to accept all received commands before they are executed When a command is received a small dialog will be displayed in the bottom right corner of your screen The dialog will display the IP address or hostname of the sender as well as information about the command itself To accept the command click the Accept button If you do not want to accept the command click the Decline button Alerts upon Executed Commands As part of the configuration your NetMatrix Monitor application may have been set up to automatically display alerts each time a command is executed When this is the case a small alert box will be displayed in the bottom right corner of your screen upon each executed command The alert box will inform you about the executed command The alert box will close automatically after 10 seconds If required you can close the alert box manually at any time Shortcut Menus Two shortcut menus are available when working with the NetMatrix Monitor application 210 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual NetMatr
19. remote live requests Create default schedule for new cameras If selected no SMS alerts will be sent if NetDVMS loses contact with a camera Otherwise SMS alerts will provided the SMS alert feature has been enabled in the SMS settings window automatically be sent if NetDVMS loses contact with a camera regardless of any e mail alerts periods defined in the Camera Alert Scheduler window Cameras may be stopped for example because they have reached the end of an online schedule in which case NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users will not be able to view live video from the cameras However if Start cameras on remote live requests Is selected NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users will be able to start the camera in order to view live video from the camera If selected default a schedule specifying that the camera is always online i e transferring video to NetDVMS will automatically be created in the Camera Alert Scheduler window The automatically created schedule can be edited manually at any time 83 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output If not selected no schedule will automatically be created meaning that the camera will not automatically be transferring video to NetDVMS When required schedules can be added manually in the Camera Alert Scheduler window Email Settings Clicking the Email Settings button opens the E Mail setup window in which you enable and config
20. the clock jumps backward from 02 00 DST to 01 00 standard time repeating that hour and the day thus has 25 hours In that case you will reach 01 59 59 then immediately revert back to 01 00 00 If the system did not react it would essentially re record that hour so the first instance of for example 01 30 would be overwritten by the second instance of 01 30 Because of this NetDVMS will forcefully archive the current video in the event that the system time changes by more than five minutes The first instance of the 01 00 hour will not be viewable directly from access clients NetGuard NetGuard EVS and Ocularis Client Lite However the data is recorded and safe and it can be browsed using the Viewer application by opening the archived database directly 218 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Virus Scanning Virus Scanning Virus scanning on the NetDVMS server and computers to which data is archived should if possible be avoided e f you are using virus scanning software on the NetDVMS server or on a computer to which data is archived It Is likely that the virus scanning will use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning all the data which is being archived This may affect system performance negatively Also virus scanning software may temporarily lock each file it scans which may further impact system performance negatively e Likewise virus scanning software on the NetDVMS server is
21. this will display the E Mail Report button in the Viewer s toolbar enabling users to send evidence via e mail If you clear the check box the E Mail Report button will not be available in the Viewer s toolbar Use of the e mail feature is only possible when the Viewer is run on the surveillance system server itself not in a Viewer exported with video evidence Specifying Recipients You specify the e mail addresses to which e mail alerts should be sent in the Recipient s field If specifying more than one e mail address separate the e mail addresses with semicolons example aa aa aa bb bb bb cc cc cc Note If e mail alerts are enabled for the Viewer the content you specify in the Recipient s field will appear as the default value in the Viewer s dialog for sending evidence via e mail Users will be able to overwrite this default value Specifying Sender Settings Specify sender information in the following fields Note SSL Secure Socket Layer is not supported if the sender belongs on a server that requires SSL the e mail alerts will not work properly Also you may be required to disable any e mail scanners that could prevent the application sending the e mail alert e Sender e mail address Type the e mail address you wish to appear as the sender of the e mail alert e Outgoing mail SMTP server name Type the name of the SMTP server which will be used for sending the e mail alerts e Server requires login Selec
22. you may have to click the expand icon l in front of the name of camera or other device to see the listing Deer Mirto dl ra Ar i Click OK to close the Event Buttons window and return to the Administrator window The defined event button will now be available in the NetGuard EVS as described in the beginning of this text Note that individual users rights may them from accessing specific cameras and or events in NetGuard EVS such rights are defined through the mage Server Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the event button will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS 143 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output How to Add a VMD Event Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc An event may also trigger several actions simultaneously Grip If you are specifically looking for information about how to configure motion detection triggered activation of an output device only such as a siren a strobe light etc see How to Add a Motion Triggered Output Several types of events exist see About Input Events amp Output In the following you will see how to define an event based on NetDVMS detec
23. 8 The device will be listed in the Administrator window s Device Manager section To view a list of cameras attached to the device click the plus sign next to the device name Grip Cameras are listed for each device with default names such as Camera 1 etc If you want to change the name of a camera right click the camera name in question then select Edit from the menu that appears Grip Individual cameras listed in the Device Manager section are by default enabled meaning that video from the cameras are by default transferred to NetDVMS provided that the cameras are marked as online in the Camera Alert Scheduler Window also default If required you can disable a camera listed in the Device Manager section by right clicking the name of the camera in question See more information under Administrator window 31 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Edit Device Settings Window The Edit device settings window lets you edit the settings of an already installed device ait device petting kisii des licor Eipre Tee PEPE Det Dace Drar Hg P E Lin p ee Dera Serta Rees Carle Lilas E Paba Lowe dry Grable Fare Fieteri ett dor viens Derrida den a pai IE AAA T Ca a Hilo Poet E Ca a Pep Peet Pool Parar en w we The Edit device settings window JAccess To access the Edit device settings window s
24. 9 falling e High Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is rising For exact information about what constitutes a falling and a rising signal respectively refer to documentation for the sensor and device in question External Lets you edit the name of the input event event name Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt II Note Some camera devices only support event names of a certain length and or with a certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details Send e mail Select check box to send an e mail alert when the input occurs if this event occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window 110 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Field Description Include Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is image from selected camera Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the input event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list next to the check box Send SMS if Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs this event occurs Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window Multiple Input Events Window The Multiple Input Events window is used for dev
25. Adjust Motion Detection window for more information Timer events are separate events triggered by the input event VMD event generic event or event button under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred or the event button under which they have been defined has been clicked Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only A camera starts recording based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the recording after 15 seconds Lights are switched on and a camera starts recording based on a VMD event i e when motion is detected a timer event stops the recording after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes To define a timer event do the following 1 A timer event requires that an input event VMD event generic event or event button has already been defined Begin by selecting the required event or event button e If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Input or VMD Event Click the Administrator window s I O Setup button to open the I O Setup window In the I O Setup window s Defined events list click the plus sign H next to the required device select the required input or VMD event then click the Add new event button to open the New Timer window e If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Event Bu
26. CGI script commands Also check the release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used Note If you are using several NetDVMS servers in your surveillance solution input and output on a specific device should be defined on one of the servers only Do not define the same input or output on the same device on several servers This applies even for dedicated I O devices see also Using Dedicated I O Devices Using Dedicated O Devices In addition to IP video camera devices and IP video encoder devices it is possible to add a number of dedicated I O input output devices to NetDVMS see How to Add a Device For information about which I O devices are supported refer to the release note When such I O devices are added input on the I O devices can be used to generate events in NetDVMS and events in NetDVMS can be used for activating output on the I O devices This means that I O devices can be used in your events based system setup in the same way as a camera Note When using some I O devices it is necessary for the surveillance system to regularly check the state of the devices input ports in order to detect whether input has been received Such state checking at regular intervals is called polling The interval between state checks called a polling frequency is specified in the Advanced window For such I O devices the polling frequency should be set to the lowest possibl
27. Control a security component in Windows Vista Note however that it is possible to disable User Account Control For more information search www microsoft com for Vista User Account Control or similar NetDVMS uses particular ports when communicating with other computers cameras etc what is a port A port is a logical endpoint for data traffic Networks use different ports for different types of data traffic Therefore it is sometimes but not always necessary to specify which port to use for particular data communication Most ports are used automatically based on the types of data included in the communication On TCP IP networks port numbers range from O to 65536 but only ports O to 1024 are reserved for particular purposes For example port 80 is used for HTTP traffic which is used when viewing web pages When using NetDVMS make sure that the following ports are open for data traffic on your network e Port 20 and 21 inbound and outbound Used for FTP traffic FTP File Transfer Protocol is a standard for exchanging files across networks FTP uses the TCP IP standards for data transfer and is often used for uploading or downloading files to and from servers e Port 25 inbound and outbound Used for SMTP traffic SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is a standard for sending e mail messages between servers This port should be open since depending on configuration some cameras may send images to the surveillance system server
28. Ftp Server Port Alert Port SMTP Port Polling Frequency 1 10 sec Lets you specify port number to use for sending event information from the device to the surveillance system via FTP Default port is port 21 Lets you specify port number to use for handling event based alerts Including generic events Default port is port 1234 Lets you specify port number to use for sending event information from the device to the surveillance system via SMTP Default port is port 25 For a small number of devices primarily I O devices see Using Dedicated I O Devices It is necessary for the surveillance system to regularly check the state of the devices input ports in order to detect whether input has been received Such state checking at regular intervals is called polling The Polling Frequency field lets you specify the interval between state checks Interval is specified in tenths of a second Default value is 10 tenths of a second i e one second For I O devices it is highly recommended that the polling frequency is set to the lowest possible value one tenth of a second between state checks For information about which devices require polling see the release note 117 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output New Timer Window The New Timer window lets you specify the settings for timer events Timer events are separate events triggered by the input event VMD event
29. Maa pees y e This will automatically add a VMD event to the selected device unless the selected device is a video encoder see below o If the selected device is a video encoder several cameras may be attached to the device and a separate dialog will prompt you to select the required camera cd rl 7 Mb Eran ar i id Pic ieee ed OC th sade Vd El om cre lt 239 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to When ready click OK 3 Inthe I O Setup window your newly defined VMD event will now be listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the device to see the listing O rip il rr a fat os Ea a Exa ar ere me VEL Evert Am Lara I rF TE gt oe a eer eee dl Paes ae een ce beara el Click OK to close the I O Setup window and return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the VMD event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS Grip For video encoder devices you are able to define a VMD event for each connected camera simply repeat above process Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc An event may also trigger several actions simultaneously
30. Manual How to For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS NetMatrix allows distributed viewing of live video from any camera on any monitor on a network operating with NetDVMS Access You access the NetMatrix Configuration window by clicking the NetMatrix button in the Administrator window The NetMatrix Configuration window has two tabs the Config tab lets you define individual computers on which it should be possible to view NetMatrix triggered content Such computers are known as NetMatrix recipients the Event tab lets you define which events should trigger which actions in individual NetMatrix recipients Config Tab The Config tab is used for enabling NetMatrix functionality and for defining which computers to display NetMatrix triggered live video on A computer on which NetMatrix triggered video can be displayed is known as a NetMatrix recipient Being able to view NetMatrix triggered video requires that either a NetGuard EVS or the dedicated NetMatrix Monitor software is installed on the user s computer Grip See the minimum system requirements for using the NetMatrix Monitor software under System Requirements 244 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to The Config tab contains the following fields check boxes and buttons Box Button Enable NetMatrix List of Defin
31. Manual Video Clients Starting and Configuring the NetPDA NetCell Client You start the NetPDA NetCell Client by tapping your PDA s Start button selecting Programs then tapping the NetPDA NetCell Client icon When first started your NetPDA NetCell Client must be configured before it is able to connect to the NetPDA NetCell Server Note During configuration you will be asked to specify the NetPDA NetCell Server s IP address port number and virtual directory Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt To configure your NetPDA NetCell Client do the following 1 Tap anywhere on your NetPDA NetCell Client s opening page 2 Hold down the pointer pen until the a menu is shown Configuration Login Version 3 Inthe menu select Configuration This will open the NetPDA NetCell Client s configuration page 192 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients Serra coniuratio Host IP 19g 168 128 10 son hoctcaton 4 In the configuration page s Host IP field specify the IP address of the server running the NetPDA NetCell Server In the example in step 3 the IP address of the server is 192 168 128 10 5 In the Port field specify the port on which the NetPDA NetCell Server is running Default is 8080 6 Inthe Application field specify the virtual directory in which the NetPDA NetCell Server is installed on the 115 Default is PDAServer 7 T
32. OK to close the master server s Image Server Administrator window thus restarting the Image Server service Keep Transition Period as Short as Possible It is recommended that you keep the transition period as short as possible as client connections security will be considerably stronger once all servers involved in the master slave setup have been upgraded to NetDVMS 6 0 or later and the master server s Pre 6 0 Version Slaves check box has been cleared Also while the Pre 6 0 Version Slaves check box is selected the Image Server Administrator window s Max Number of Clients feature will only apply for NetGuard not for NetGuard EVS Log Files Section In the Log Files section specify the number of days to keep log files in the Image Server s regular event log By default such log files are kept for ten days before they are deleted 92 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Grip Read more about NetDVMS logging in About Logging Audit Log Section Audit logging is the logging of access client user actions If this type of logging is required select the Enable Audit Logging check box When audit logging is enabled you are able to specify the following values e Days to log Number of days in which audit log files should be kept before they are overwritten Default is 30 days If you specify O zero audit log files will be kept indefinitely disk storage space permitting
33. Protocol Select which protocol NetDVMS should listen for Any i e TCP as well as UDP TCP only or UDP only Which port is used NetDVMS listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window default is port 1234 e Event rule type Select how particular NetDVMS should be when analyzing received data packages Match if the received package must contain only the exact message specified in the Event message include field see description in the following Search if the received package must contain the message specified in the Event message include field but may also have other content e Event priority Specify a priority between O lowest priority and 1000 highest priority for the event in case a received data package matches more than one event e Event rule string Specify what NetDVMS should look out for when analyzing the data packages then click the Add button to add the specified term s to the Event message include field the content of which is used when analyzing received data packages You are furthermore able to use processing order parentheses and two different Boolean operators in the Event message include field by clicking the buttons 229 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to to the right of the field e Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send Email if this event occurs check box Note t
34. The selected output is moved up one step each time you click the up button Likewise each time you click the down button the selected output is moved down one step 53 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output To remove an output from the On Manual Control list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list Selecting Output for Use on Motion Detection You are able to select outputs to be triggered automatically when motion is detected in video from the camera Grip This feature does not require that a VMD Video Motion Detection event has been defined for the camera in the I O Setup window To select an output for use when motion is detected in video from the camera 3 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Grip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 4 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list To remove an output from the On Motion Detected list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the O
35. This action is recommended if archiving is enabled for the camera o Delete no repair If the database becomes corrupted the contents of the database will be deleted o Archive no repair Available only if archiving is enabled for the camera If the database becomes corrupted the contents of the database will be archived Chip Provided the corrupt database has been archived it can be repaired by the Viewer Open the Viewer and attempt to browse the archived recordings from the camera in question Browsing will initially fail but this will make the Viewer start repairing the corrupt database Grip See also How to Protect Databases from Corruption When the contents of the local database for the camera are either deleted or archived the database is reset and will be ready for storing new recordings Note No video can be recorded while the database is being repaired For large installations a repair may take several hours especially if the Repair Scan Delete if fails action involving two different repair methods is selected and the first repair method fast repair fails 43 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Database Resizing In case recordings for a camera get bigger than expected or the available drive space is suddenly reduced in another way an advanced database resizing procedure will automatically take place If archives are present on the same drive as the
36. Yes Use Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS These NET based clients offer more features for remote users than the other solutions NET Framework downloadable from http www microsoft com downloads is required on computers running Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS See the separate Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS documentation for exact system requirements e No Use NetGuard NetGuard is not a NET based solution Differences between NetGuard and NetGuard EVS The following table outlines the main differences between NetGuard and NetGuard EVS Two Access Clients at a Glance Remote User s Installation Remote User s Feature Set Remote User s Ease of Use System Administrator s Installation System Administrator s Feature Set System Administrator s Access Control Options Client Flexibility re Future Features and NetGuard NetGuard EVS None client is accessed Client must be installed on from server through a remote user s computer browser NET Framework is required on computers running NetGuard EVS A good set of standard Very feature rich features Very easy to use Setup of views can be handled locally as well as centrally With central views handling remote users can begin using their clients instantly upon first login The Image Server and Download Manager runs as automatically installed services on the NetDVMS server Only if clients are required in other languages than the NetDV
37. able to configure event buttons to suit the exact needs of your organization Your main entry point for configuring event buttons is the Administrator window Clicking the Administrator window s Event Buttons button will open the Event Buttons window in which you specify each individual event button Event buttons can be used for a wide variety of purposes for example e As start and stop events for use in the Camera Alert Scheduler window For example you can make a camera start or stop transferring video to the surveillance system when an event button is selected e As start and stop events for use in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window For example you can make a camera use a higher frame rate when an event button is selected or you can use an event button for manually triggering PIZ preset positions on event e For triggering outputs Particular outputs can be associated with the clicking of an event button you do this in the I O Control window e For triggering event based e mail and or SMS alerts e In combinations For example the clicking of an event button could make a camera start transferring video to the surveillance system while two outputs are triggered and an e mail alert is sent to relevant people Event Buttons Window Event buttons can be global available for all cameras or tied to a particular camera only available when the camera in question is selected The Event Buttons window l
38. all or parts of the NetDVMS server For more information see Virus Scanning Information Help System To use NetDVMS s built in help system simply press the F1 key on your keyboard while using NetDVMS E When you press Fl the help system will open in a separate window allowing you to easily switch between help and NetDVMS itself The help system in is context sensitive This means that when you press F1 for help while working in a particular NetDVMS window the help system automatically displays the help topic describing that window Navigating the Built in Help System Even though the help system initially takes you to a topic describing the window you are working in you are always able to freely navigate between the help system s contents To do this simply use the help window s three tabs Contents Search and Glossary or use the links inside the help topics Contents Tab The Contents tab lets you navigate the help system based on a tree structure Many users will be familiar with this type of navigation from for example Windows Explorer Search Tab 256 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to The Search tab lets you search for help topics containing particular terms of interest For example you can search for the term camera and every help topic containing the term camera will be listed in the search results Clicking a help topic title in the search results list will open the requ
39. are available e Events Ability to use NetGuard EVS s or Ocularis Client Lite s Event feature for manually triggering events e Listen to microphone Ability to listen to live audio from the selected camera s microphone s available only if the selected camera has microphone s attached Note The Listen to microphone feature is available in NetGuard EVS or Ocularis Client Lite only e Talk to speaker Ability to talk to the selected camera s speaker s available only if the selected camera has speaker s attached Note The Talk to speaker feature is available in NetGuard EVS or Ocularis Client Lite only 101 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output In the Browse column the following features all selected by default are available Browse Ability to browse recorded video from the selected camera AVI JPG Export Ability to generate and export evidence as movie clips in the AVI format and as still images in the J PG format Database Export Ability to generate and export evidence in database format Note The Database Export feature is available in NetGuard EVS only Sequences Ability to use the Sequences feature for browsing video from a selected camera Smart Search Ability to use NetGuard EVS s Smart Search feature with which users are able to search for motion in one or more selected areas of images from the selected camera Note The Database Export feature is
40. are done testing you can move any temporarily removed events back to the Active Events list 4 Click OK in the Setup Notifications on Events window click OK in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window then click the Exit button in the Administrator window 5 Make sure NetDVMS s recording server service Also make sure that the camera for which you configured the event notification is displayed in your NetGuard or NetGuard EVS 6 In Windows Start menu select Run and type the following in the Open field e If you are performing the test on the NetDVMS server itself 148 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual 7 Input Events amp Output telnet localhost 1234 e If you are performing the test from a remote computer Substitute localhost with the IP address of the NetDVMS server Example If the IP address of the NetDVMS server is 123 123 123 123 type telnet 123 123 123 123 1234 Note In the above examples the number 1234 indicates the port on which the NetDVMS server listens for generic events Port 1234 is the default port for this purpose but it is possible to change this by specifying another port number in the Advanced window s Alert Port field If the alert port number has been changed on your system type your system s alert port number instead of 1234 This will open a Telnet window In the Telnet window type the term so called event substring required to trigger
41. available in NetGuard EVS only Audio Ability to listen to recorded audio from the selected camera s microphone s available only if the selected camera has microphone s attached Note The Audio feature is available in NetGuard EVS or Ocularis Client Lite only Grip Note that some of the features are mutually dependent For example in order have access to PTZ or output features a user must also have access to viewing live video and in order to use AVI and JPG export a user must have access to browsing recorded video 6 Repeat as required for other users groups what if a user is a member of a group which has different rights than the user itself When this is the case for example when the user Paul himself has been given rights to do A and B whereas the Security Staff group of which Paul is a member has been given rights to do A B and C the sum of the rights will apply for the user Paul in our example would then due to his group membership have rights to do A B and C 102 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Input Events amp Output Input received from a wide variety of sources can be used to generate events in NetDVMS Events can in turn be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions making video automatical
42. between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list i Output Settings tor Stairs Camera 1 Da Br Coney Has 50m Dace 1 Dario dara This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list which lists all outputs to be automatically triggered when motion is detected by the camera Good to know e You are not limited to selecting output connected to the camera itself If output has been defined on other cameras devices on the NetDVMS system this output will also be selectable in the All Outputs list e An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way e The Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window also lets you select output for manual triggering in an OnSSI client This is further described in How to Add a Manually Controlled Output 8 When ready click the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window s Exit button to return to the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 236 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual 10 How to In the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click OK to return to the Administrator window Close the Administrator The defined output will now be triggered automatically when motion is detected by the selected camera Note that the automatic output triggering will be controlled entirely by your motion detection settings for the camera in question See the description of the
43. cannot use the same name for several devices Opens the Camera Settings for Device Name window in which you are able to specify a number of settings for cameras attached to the device including e Port through which PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras are controlled e Camera names types and ports Note The number of settings available in the Camera Settings for Device Name window may be limited if cameras are not PTZ cameras or connected to a video encoder device Serial number of device usually identical to the 12 character MAC address of the device example 0123456789AF Grip NetDVMS is able to automatically detect serial number as well as device type provided the IP address host name and password of the device have been specified in the P address DNS Host Name and Root Password fields Simply click the Detect Device button to auto detect device type and serial number A 16 character license key DLK for the device obtained when registering the software Enables the use of fisheye a technology that allows viewing of 360 degree panoramic images Note Use of the fisheye technology requires either a dedicated fisheye camera or a regular camera equipped with a special fisheye camera lens for which a special fisheye license key is required If the device in question is for a dedicated fisheye camera the check box is selected by default and you do not have to enter a fisheye license key in the neighboring field Lice
44. capacity required for archiving depends entirely on the amount of recordings you plan to archive Some organizations want to keep archived recordings from a large number of cameras for several months or years Other organizations may only want to archive recordings from one or two cameras and they may want to keep their archives for much shorter periods of time Before enabling archiving you should always consider the storage capacity of the local drive containing the default archiving directory to which archives are always moved even though they may immediately after be moved to an archiving location on a network drive As a rule of thumb the capacity of the local drive should be at least twice the size required for storing the databases of all cameras for which archiving has been specified When archiving data from a camera to external locations including archiving locations on network drives NetDVMS automatically checks that the space required for data to be archived plus 1 GB of free disk space per camera is available at the external location If not the external archive location s oldest data from the camera in question will be deleted until there is sufficient free space for the new data to be archived 66 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output In short When estimating storage capacity required for archiving consider your organization s needs then plan for worst case rather than bes
45. click anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window and select Config from the menu that appears Pull Screen wf vs On Top Config Hide do 2 Specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor Password Validation EJ Erie Pasorad Or Cancel 3 Click OK This will open the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window Each of the window s settings is described in the previous section First Time Configuration 4 Make the required changes and click OK when ready You watch video feeds from connected cameras in the NetMatrix Monitor window Opening the NetMatrix Monitor Window Depending on configuration the NetMatrix Monitor window may appear on your screen automatically If the NetMatrix Monitor application is not running you can start it by double clicking the NetMatrix Monitor shortcut on your desktop You may also find that the NetMatrix Monitor application is running but in hidden mode When the NetMatrix Monitor application runs in hidden mode you will not see the NetMatrix Monitor window until there is video to display You will however still be able to access the window by double clicking the NetMatrix icon in Windows notification area also Known as the system tray typically located in the bottom right corner of your screen QO DI 10 Example only your notification area may have different content 1x1 and 2x2 View Depending on configuration your NetMatrix Monitor window wi
46. click the Add new output event button 1 0 Setup Defined events gt AXIS 221 Executive Office Cam 1 Reception gt Stairs Add new event Add new output event Add YMD Event Motion Detection Advanced This will open the Add New Output window 3 Inthe Add New Output window the External output connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Now specify information in the following fields e Output connected on Select the camera device output port on which the output unit is connected Many cameras devices only have a single output port in that case simply select Output 1 e Keep output for Specify the amount of time for which the output should be active when triggered in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information 152 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output e External output name Specify a name for the output The name will appear on the button list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output Note that output names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp In the following example we have specified that a siren connected on a camera s Output 1 port should
47. computer on which NetMatrix triggered video can be displayed is known as a NetMatrix recipient Being able to view NetMatrix triggered video requires that either a NetGuard EVS or the dedicated NetMatrix Monitor software Is installed on the user s computer Tip See the minimum system requirements for using the NetMatrix Monitor software under System Requirements The Config tab contains the following fields check boxes and buttons Field Check Description Box Button Enable Select check box to enable NetMatrix functionality NetMatrix 158 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Field Check Description Box Button List of Lists any already defined NetMatrix recipients e computers on Defined which NetMatrix triggered video can be displayed NetMatrix recipients To change the properties of an already defined NetMatrix recipient select the required NetMatrix recipient make the changes in the fields below the list then click the Update button To remove a NetMatrix recipient from the list select the unwanted NetMatrix recipient then click the Delete button You will be prompted to confirm the removal Delete Available only when you have selected a NetMatrix recipient in the list Clicking the Delete button will remove the selected NetMatrix recipient You will be prompted to confirm the removal Name Used when adding a new NetMatrix recipient or editing the pro
48. default HTTP port 80 and FTP port 21 will be used for the device If the device you are adding uses other port numbers click the Port Setup button and specify required port numbers The need for specifying different ports may often apply if the device is located behind a NAT enabled router or a firewall When this is the case also remember to configure the router firewall so it maps the ports and IP address used by the device When ready click Next to go to the second step of the wizard 4 Ifa password is used for the device type the password for the device s administrator account called the admin or root account on some devices Leave the Autodetect Device option selected then click Next 5 When the device has been detected type the Device License Key DLK for the device in the DLK field Device Setup Wizard EW Tia sfere Pau Pard de Polo eds device or Pa pacta FP addres ideo Dirrica Type BAL ddr Ai AS NO MDE aa Papas pria hg e Laa Ej EALE Y bo ak ae ii Pins Me b ai Feda iion nd Ara of E ea cel e dio Lar more incest DU ETE SE A cik Canos Specifying DLK for the device Grip If you have imported DLKs see How to Import Device License Keys the DLK field will already be filled with the DLK for the device Click Next 6 Assign a unique and descriptive name to the device Upon completion of the wizard the name will be used when listing devices and associated cameras in the Administrator window s Devi
49. dl POA Server settings In the lower half of the NetPDA NetCell Server Administrator dialog verify that the Test enabled check box is selected then click the link below the check box to open the test interface in a browser a ga j P a wi fa A oR mo Gh E JAN AA 7 Peet ear terior for ther PIR erever i ti r Log in to the test interface by typing the user name and password as set up on the Image Server then click the Login button The test interface will now log in to the Image Server and list all cameras to which the user has access Click one of the camera links in the test interface s left frame If an image the latest recorded image from the selected camera is displayed the NetPDA NetCell Server is installed correctly 189 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients NetPDA NetCell Server Installation Troubleshooting The following issues may occasionally occur during or upon installation of the NetPDA NetCell Server For each issue one or more solutions are available NetPDA NetCell Server Cannot Be Installed Solutions e Make sure that IIS is installed e Make sure that IIS is set up to use the correct port default is port 8080 and that the same port number was used when the virtual directory was specified e Make sure that IIS is running Test Interface Cannot Be Displayed Solutions e Make sure that the NET Framework is registered on th
50. events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Acvanced window default is port 1234 Lets you select how particular NetDVMS should be when analyzing received data packages e Match In order for the event to occur the received package must contain exactly the message specified in the Event rule string section s Event message include field and nothing else e Search In order for the event to occur the received package must contain the message specified in the Event rule string section s Event message include field but may also have more content Example If you have specified that the event message should contain the terms User001 and Door053 the event will be triggered if the message includes the terms User001 and Door053 and Sunday The same data package may be analyzed for different events The ability to assign a priority to each event lets you manage which event should be triggered if a received package matches the criteria for several events The priority must be specified as a number between O lowest priority and 1000 highest priority 132 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Field Description When NetDVMS receives a TCP and or UDP package analysis of the packet will start with analysis for the event with the highest priority This way when a package matches the criteria for several events only the event with the highest prio
51. files are subjected to an integrity check once every 24 hours The result of the integrity check is automatically written to a file named according to the structure LogCheck_ YYYYMMDD log e g LogCheck_20070615 log The log check file is by default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software Any inconsistencies will be reported in the form of error messages written in the log check file The following table lists possible error messages other non error messages may also appear in the log check file Error Message Description Log integrity information was not found Log integrity can t be guaranteed Log information does not match integrity information Log integrity can t be guaranteed Log file name not found Log file name is empty Last line changed removed in log file name Encrypted data missing in log file name near line Inconsistency found in log file name near line Inconsistency found in log file name at beginning of log file The log file could not be checked for integrity The log file exists but does not contain the expected information Thus log integrity cannot be guaranteed The log file was not present The log file was present but empty The last line of the log file did not match validation criteria The encrypted part of the log line in question was not present The log line does not match the encr
52. left of the check box Root Password required in order to log in to the device using the Password root account occasionally known as an admin or administrator account Note The number of settings available in the Camera Settings for Device Name window may be limited if cameras are not PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras or connected to a video encoder device The Camera Settings for Device Name window lets you specify certain information about a device s cameras This is primarily interesting for PTZ cameras and cameras attached to a video encoder device 34 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Camera Settings for Wideo Sarees Ed PIT Cates HA D Eam of fe crenata cuneate re Par TITO Crt a PIT IZ ype controle tesi OOM FIT IZ mat comic eg COM Carreta Hare Lam Humbe Came bpp Em Tori ai Producir sra W Production dira E Sua Canteen uI Fred pS Wa Fred Easy Hana Canute Comas Tips Des Por Post dde Fudachon dis El wF cue The Camera Settings for Device Name window Access You access the Camera Settings for Device Name window by clicking the Camera Settings button in the Edit device settings window The Camera Settings for Device Name window is divided into a P T Z Camera Selection section and a camera list P T Z Camera Selection Section The P T Z Camera selection section contains the following fields Fie
53. likely to use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning data used by the Download Manager If allowed in your organization you should therefore disable any virus scanning of affected areas such as camera databases etc on the NetDVMS server as well as on any archiving destinations 219 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual 3 GB Switching 3 GB Switching Microsoft Windows 32 bit operating systems can address 4 GB of virtual memory The operating system kernel reserves 2 GB for itself and each individual running process is allowed to address another 2 GB This is Windows default setting and for the vast majority of NetDVMS installations it works fine Since the release of NetDVMS version 6 5d the main components of the server the Recording Server service and the Image Server service have been compiled with the LARGEADDRESSAWARE flag This means you can optimize the memory usage of NetDVMS s Recording Server and Image Server services by configuring your 32 bit Windows operating system so that it restricts the kernel to 1GB of memory leaving 3GB of address space for processes compiled with the LARGE ADDRESSAWARE flag This should improve the stability of especially the Recording Server service by allowing it to exceed the previous 2 GB virtual memory limit making it possible for it to use up to 3 GB of memory The change in Windows configuration is known as 3 GB switching When Is 3 GB Switchi
54. limited only by the available hardware storage capacity You enable and configure archiving in the Archive setup window The Archive setup window also lets you specify where archives should be stored for each camera Benefits of Archiving By default information received from cameras is stored by NetDVMS in a database for each camera The database for each camera see Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window is capable of containing a maximum of 600 000 records or 40 GB before the oldest records in the database are overwritten With archiving the amount of records you are able to store is limited only by the available hardware storage capacity Note however that it is only possible to archive up to 40 GB per camera per day By using archiving you will also be able to back up archived records on backup media of your choice using your preferred backup software How Archiving Works For each camera for which archiving has been specified the contents of the camera database will be moved to a default archiving directory called Archives This will happen automatically one or more times every day depending on your archiving settings The default archiving directory is located on the computer running the NetDVMS software by default in the directory containing the NetDVMS software In the archiving directory separate sub directories for storing archives for each camera are automatically created These sub directories are
55. named after the MAC address of the device to which the camera is connected Since you are able to keep archives spanning many days of recordings and since archiving may take place several times a day further sub directories named after the archiving date and time are also automatically created The sub directories will be named according to the following structure Archives CameraMACAddress_ VideoEncoderChannellDateAndTime Example With the default archiving folder located under C videodata video from an archiving taking place at 23 15 on 1st June 2008 for a camera attached to channel 2 on a video encoder device with the MAC address 00408c51e181 would be stored at the following destination C videodata Archives 00408c51e181_2 2008 06 01 23 15 65 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output If the device to which the camera is attached is not a video encoder device with several channels the video encoder channel indication in the sub directory named after the device s MAC address will always be 1 Example e g 00408c51le181 1 Storing Archives at Other Locations than the Default Archiving Directory You are of course also able to store archives at other locations than locally in the default archiving directory You may for example specify that your archives should be stored on a network drive When archiving to other locations than the default archiving directory NetDVMS will fir
56. of cameras listed on your organization s license sheet regardless of you number of available DLKs For example a fully used four port video encoder counts as four cameras even though the cameras are connected through a single device therefore a fully used four port video encoder will use four licenses System administrators obtain DLKs as part of the software registration process You are able to specify each DLK manually when adding a device through the Device Setup Wizard available by clicking the Add Device button in the Administrator window However you can avoid having to specify each DLK manually by using the following procedure to import all received DLKs into NetDVMS in one go Prerequisites The DLKs received in a dlk file must have been saved at a location accessible by the surveillance server for example on a network drive or on a USB stick 1 Open the Administrator window 2 Inthe Administrator window click the Import DLKs button 3 Browse to the location at which you have saved the received dlk file Select the file and click Open 248 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to All DLKs are now automatically imported and the relevant DLK will automatically appear when you add a device through the Device Setup Wizard Once you have added a generic event see How to Add a Generic Event a quick and easy way to test your generic event is to first set up an event notification and
57. pap y daa ar ia See Plier echo bm ay vei rara This will open the Setup Notifications on Events window 3 Inthe Setup Notifications on Events window s Available Events list expand the Generic item and select your generic event Then click the gt gt button to move the selected generic event to the Active Events list 249 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to tebep Metific ation on Events EJ Seo rola ar Piel A sr Cerera 7 A ate E rely orale E wards a Saree a Vide E Giba 1 eae Oe OF toa Note Make sure that your generic event is the only event appearing in the Active Events list while you are performing the test otherwise you cannot be sure that it is your generic event which triggers the event notification Once you are done testing you can move any temporarily removed events back to the Active Events list 4 Click OK in the Setup Notifications on Events window click OK in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window then click the Exit button in the Administrator window 5 Make sure NetDVMS s recording server service Also make sure that the camera for which you configured the event notification is displayed in your NetGuard or NetGuard EVS 6 In Windows Start menu select Run and type the following in the Open field e If you are performing the test on the NetDVMS server itself telnet localhost 1234 e If you are performing
58. preset positions defined on the camera or video encoder device Using preset positions from the camera or video encoder device will clear any preset positions you have defined for the PTZ camera you will therefore be asked to confirm your selection Note In order for preset positions from the camera or video encoder device to work with NetDVMS the names of the preset positions must contain only the characters A Z a z and 0 9 and must not contain spaces If preset position names on the camera or video encoder device contain other characters or spaces change the preset position names on the device before selecting the Use preset positions from device feature Associates the preset position selected in the list with the position specified in the PTZ View section If the preset position selected in the list is yet undefined you will be asked to specify a name for the preset position Lets you edit a preset position name selected in the list Only works for an already defined preset position name Lets you test a defined preset position Select the required preset position in the list then click the Test button The effect is displayed instantly in the PTZ View section Lets you delete a preset position selected in the list When a preset position name is deleted it will appear as undefined in the list Lets you move a preset position selected in the list up and down respectively 58 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc
59. recordings until the Recording Server service is restarted even though the original database may no longer be locked you may in 69 NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output On Net Surveillance Systems Inc these extremely rare situations experience that new recordings are not viewable through NetGuard EVS or Ocularis Client Lite In that case restarting the Recording Server service will help since it will force the original database to again be used for storing new recordings Archive Setup Window The Archive setup window lets you enable and configure the archiving feature It also lets you specify where archives should be stored JAccess To access the Archive setup window click the Archive Setup button in the Administrator window Fields and Buttons The Archive setup window contains the following fields and buttons Field Button Description Enable Select check box to enable the archiving feature Archiving Note Remember to specify for which cameras the archiving feature should be used you do this in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section at the bottom of the window Delete Lets you specify how many days you want to keep archived databases in recordings for Archived recordings older than the specified number the backup of days will automatically be deleted directory older than In the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Automatically de
60. select Device drivers from the menu and click Next 7 The wizard is now ready to install the video device drivers Click the Install button to complete the installation of the video device drivers 8 When ready remember to start any stopped Recording Server service again 217 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Daylight Saving Time Daylight Saving Time Daylight saving time DST also known as summer time is the practice of advancing clocks in order for evenings to have more daylight and mornings to have less Typically clocks are adjusted forward one hour sometime during the spring season and adjusted backward sometime during the fall season hence the saying spring forward fall back Note that use of DST varies between countries regions Yi Clocks are adjusted forward when DST starts When working with a surveillance system which is inherently time sensitive it is important to know how the system handles DST Spring Switch from Standard Time to DST The change from standard time to DST is not much of an issue since you jump one hour forward Typically the clock jumps forward from 02 00 standard time to 03 00 DST and the day thus has 23 hours In that case there is simply no data between 02 00 and 03 00 in the morning since that hour for that day did not exist Fall Switch from DST to Standard Time When you switch from DST to standard time in the fall you jump one hour back Typically
61. select the Send SMS if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window 4 Inthe I O Setup window your newly defined event is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing PO iip bl rr Pome Di E de Er Gen Ph h LESA Tan dd re ol dered A A ees n re da bara ml Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS 141 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output How to Add an Event Button Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc An event may also trigger several actions simultaneously Several types of events exist See About Input Events amp Output In most cases events occur and actions are triggered without the need for human intervention by NetDVMS users System administrators define the criteria for each event for example a certain amount of dete
62. sensitivity setting that matches your requirements before you make use of the automatic detection feature Show Grid With the Show grid check box selected default the preview image contains a grid indicating the division of the preview image into selectable sections With the Show grid check box cleared the grid in the preview image is removed This may provide a less obscured view of the preview image Selection of areas in which motion detection should be disabled takes place the same way as when the grid is visible Output Settings In the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window you are able to associate a camera with particular external outputs defined in the O Setup window for example the sounding of a siren or the switching on of lights The associated outputs can be triggered automatically when motion is detected as well as manually through output buttons available in NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard EVS 52 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Dl pad Genta Des Mia armed at fa al pd Ds barna rr e AAA AAA 1 A JAccess You access the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window from the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window by clicking the Outputs button Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected Motion Note Use of features in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window requ
63. size Tip The Archiving feature enables you to store recordings beyond the capabilities of cameras databases Even if already using archiving you may want to archive more frequently if recording audio and video than if only recording video Microphone Settings Window The Microphone Settings window lets you change basic settings for a microphone access You access the Microphone Settings window from the Administrator window Select a microphone in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then click the Settings button e Device name Displays the name of the microphone If required you are able to overwrite the existing microphone name with a new one e Enabled Lets you enable disable use of the microphone Grip You can also enable disable a microphone in the Administrator window Right click the required microphone in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then select Disable or Enable from the menu that appears Note On some devices a microphone can also be enabled disabled on the device itself typically through the device s own configuration web page If a microphone on a device does not work after enabling it in the Administrator application you should thus verify whether the problem may be due to the microphone being disabled on the device itself Speaker Settings Window The Speaker Settings window lets you change basic settings for a speaker Access You access the Speaker Settings window
64. software 3 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs 4 Inthe Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select Download Manager 223 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Removal 5 Click the Remove button Note If you are not an NetDVMS system administrator it is highly recommended that you consult your system administrator before removing any surveillance system related software Remove NetMatrix Prerequisites Before removing the NetMatrix Monitor application make sure the application is not running If the NetMatrix Monitor application is running shut it down by right clicking the NetMatrix Monitor icon in Windows notification area also Known as the system tray typically located in the bottom right corner of your screen then selecting Exit Note that before the application closes you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor To remove the NetMatrix Monitor application do the following 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs 2 Inthe Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select the NetMatrix Monitor 3 Click the Remove button and follow the removal instructions To remove the NetPDA NetCell Server and NetPDA NetCell Client software use the following procedures Note If you are not an NetDVMS
65. sound for five seconds when triggered Add Hew Output EJ External cufpul connected lo Har Output commected on Out Kem utia 10 corii Sehl Enteral inna Son Tem dhe OR Carcel 0 Ca rip You are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window 4 Inthe I O Setup window your newly defined output is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing il ee msi DAL J E Rhi Ba T oar tad seen eel ido rs aU rar AA A a re dara el Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administrator window 5 Inthe Administrator window first select the camera for which the output should be available then click the Settings button This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 6 Inthe Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Outputs button 153 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Caen a Santina Los Sr Cares a 1 E KELE H Lim a Emn rer h eer ss Po ed E P mgh ee EH ibero bes eee La dg Fe aie aire hers A pear pe fi po rral e OL ere er A Ire gerig Cal i A ee ae iret ft raro pe es Pre i Cambra IOo es rol Hr e red Fahri Dees Calle ee r Pill PEOR Pl EA Ha Deegan r al alar deta r
66. surveillance system NetGuard does not offer nearly as many features as Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS The main benefit of NetGuard Is that it is accessed through a browser and run directly from the surveillance system server This eliminates the need for installing any client software on the user s computer Grip See system requirements for NetGuard under System Requirements 180 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients Accessing NetGuard 1 Open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to surveillance system server The address format is typically http surveillance_system_server_address port_number Grip The port number is only required if using another port than the Image Server s default port number 80 When you connect to the server you will see a welcome page On the welcome page click the NetGuard link in order to view the NetGuard login dialog 2 To log in specify information in the following fields Please enter MT AA Soloct Preous Login Address Port Authentication Windows Curent used Username Password e Previous Logins Only available if you have logged in before Lets you reuse previously specified login details except any password which you must always type yourself This can greatly speed up the login process e Address Type the URL or IP address of the surveillance system server e Port Specify the port num
67. the plus sign next to the device to which the camera is attached select the required camera then click the Settings button to open the Camera Settings for Device name Camera Name window a Back Door East Wing 10 70 63 3 TA Camera d gt Renaming a Camera To rename a camera right click the camera name in question then select Edit from the menu that appears ae Stars 10 10 6971 Ta Camel ate Edt K This will open the Camera Name and Number window in which you are able to overwrite the existing camera name with a new one 23 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Assigning Shortcut Numbers to Cameras Users of NetGuard EVS can take advantage of a range of keyboard shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such keyboard shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify each camera Shortcut numbers must be unique for each camera To assign a shortcut number to a camera right click the camera name in question then select Edit from the menu that appears z Stairs 10 101 64 11 Eg Came Disable Edt i This will open the Camera Name and Number window in which you are able to specify a shortcut number to be used with the camera Note Camera shortcut numbers are only used in NetGuard EVS In other applications such as Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard the camera shortcuts cannot be used Grip More information abo
68. the surveillance system server then install it on your computer Alternatively your surveillance system administrator may ask you to install Ocularis Client Lite from a DVD Note Surveillance system administrators can automatically get a Ocularis Client Lite installed on the surveillance system server this happens as part of the surveillance system server installation To download and install Ocularis Client Lite from the surveillance system server do the following 179 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients 1 Verify that your computer meets Ocularis Client Lite minimum system requirements 2 Open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to the surveillance system server at the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator When you are connected to the surveillance system server you will see a welcome page 4 On the welcome page select the link Download Ocularis Client Lite 5 From the resulting page click the link Download Ocularis Client Lite 6 Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software or similar exact wording depends on your browser version When this is the case accept the security warnings by clicking Run or similar exact button names depend on your browser version 7 Ocularis Client Lite Wizard begins In the wizard click Next a
69. the surveillance system server you will see a welcome page 3 On the welcome page select your required language in the menu in the top right corner Then go to the welcome page s NetGuard EVS Installers section and click the required NetGuard EVS language version link my welcome page is different why If your organization uses an older version of the surveillance system server the welcome page looks differently In that case go to the welcome page s NetGuard EVS section and click the Download and Install NetGuard EVS Locally link 4 Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software or similar exact wording depends on your browser version When this is the case accept the security warnings by clicking Run or similar exact button names depend on your browser version 5 NetGuard EVS Setup Wizard begins In the wizard click Next and follow the installation instructions Typically you download NetGuard EVS from the surveillance system server then install it on your computer see Download and Installation from Server Alternatively your surveillance system administrator may ask you to install NetGuard EVS from a DVD 1 Verify that your computer meets NetGuard EVS s minimum system requirements 2 Insert the surveillance system software DVD wait for a short while select required language then click the Install NetGua
70. the test from a remote computer Substitute localhost with the IP address of the NetDVMS server Example If the IP address of the NetDVMS server is 123 123 123 123 type telnet 123 123 123 123 1234 Note In the above examples the number 1234 indicates the port on which the NetDVMS server listens for generic events Port 1234 is the default port for this purpose but it is possible to change this by specifying another port number in the Advanced window s Alert Port field If the alert port number has been changed on your system type your system s alert port number instead of 1234 This will open a Telnet window 7 Inthe Telnet window type the term so called event substring required to trigger your generic event In our case the required term is video 250 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to Telnet localhost lo x While typing in the Telnet window you may experience so called echo This is simply the server repeating some or all of the characters it receives it will not have any impact as long as you are sure you type the required characters 8 Close the Telnet window by clicking the close button in its top right corner 9 Goto your NetGuard or NetGuard EVS If the yellow event notification indicator lights up for the required camera your generic event works as intended Databases In the Administrator application s Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window
71. you are able to select which action to take if a camera database becomes corrupted The actions include several database repair options While being able to select such actions is highly valuable it is of course even better to take steps to ensure that your camera databases do not become corrupted Power Outages Use a UPS The single biggest reason for corrupt databases is the surveillance system server being shut down abruptly without files being saved and without the operating system being closed down properly This may happen due to power outages due to somebody accidentally pulling out the server s power cable or similar The best way of protecting your surveillance system server from being shut down abruptly is to equip your surveillance system server with a UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply The UPS works as a battery driven secondary power source providing the necessary power for saving open files and safely powering down your system in the event of power irregularities UPSs vary in sophistication but many UPSs include software for automatically saving open files for alerting system administrators etc Selecting the right type of UPS for your organization s environment is an individual process When assessing your needs however do bear in mind the amount of runtime you will require the UPS to be able to provide if the power fails saving open files and shutting down an operating system properly may take several minutes
72. you the option of removing the NetPDA NetCell Client software from the PDA as well provided the PDA is connected Click the Remove button to remove the NetPDA NetCell Client software from the PDA as well 225 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to How to Administrator In NetDVMS you add devices IP video camera devices IP video encoder devices or digital video recorder DVR devices rather than actual cameras This is because devices have their own IP addresses or host names Being IP based NetDVMS primarily identifies units on the surveillance system based on their IP addresses or host names Even though each device has its own IP address or host name several cameras can be attached to a single device and thus share the same IP address or host name This is typically the case with cameras attached to video encoder devices or DVR devices You can of course configure and use each camera individually even when several cameras are attached to a single device In addition to camera devices video encoder devices and DVR devices it is possible to add a number of dedicated I O input output devices to NetDVMS When such I O devices are added they can be used in events based system setup in the same way as a camera For more information about using I O devices see Using Dedicated I O Devices For information about which I O devices are supported refer to the release note Once a device is added
73. your generic event In our case the required term is video a Telnet localhost le MEEN NeT TT x le While typing in the Telnet window you may experience so called echo This is simply the server repeating some or all of the characters it receives it will not have any impact as long as you are sure you type the required characters Close the Telnet window by clicking the close button in its top right corner Go to your NetGuard or NetGuard EVS If the yellow event notification indicator lights up for the required camera your generic event works as intended How to Add a Timer Event Timer events are separate events triggered by the input event VMD event generic event or event button under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred or the event button under which they have been defined has been clicked Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only A camera starts recording based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the recording after 15 seconds Lights are switched on and a camera starts recording based on a VMD event e when motion is detected a timer event stops the recording after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes 149 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events
74. 003 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Business 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit and Windows Vista Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit Intel Pentium 4 2 4 GHz or higher Minimum 256 MB 512 MB recommended for larger views 1 GB 13 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual System Requirements recommended on Microsoft Windows Vista Network Ethernet 100 Mbit or higher recommended Graphics AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 Adapter recommended 16 bit colors Hard Disk Space Minimum 10 MB free Software DirectX 9 0 or newer Running as a 32 bit service application Grip To check which DirectX version is installed on a computer click Start select Run and type dxdiag When you click OK the DirectX Diagnostic Tool window will open version information is displayed near the bottom of its System tab Should the server require a DirectX update the latest versions of DirectX are available from http www microsoft com downloads NetPDA NetCell Server The NetPDA NetCell Server is typically installed on the surveillance system server see the system requirements for the surveillance system server Note however that to run the NetPDA NetCell Server the following is also required on the surveillance system server e Internet Information Services IIS 5 0 or later e Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Note that later versions of Net Framework may also be pr
75. 07 4 images Fi 2004 11 30 13 2 images 209 2004 11 33 38 3 mages OA 33533 2 magos 2052004 11 38 47 4 images TE 23 09 2004 11 38 58 3 images 198 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients To view recordings of an event select the required event in the list then tap the SELECT button The list is able to display up to 16 recorded events at a time If the list contains more than 16 recorded events use the Browse buttons to navigate the list The two outer buttons take you to the first last 16 recorded events the two inner buttons take you to the previous next 16 recorded events Full Screen View You will normally see recorded video from the selected camera in the NetPDA NetCell Client s regular view In regular view only about half of the display is available for viewing the video as the rest of the space is taken up by the navigation controls If you require a better view of the video you can easily switch to full screen view When viewing recorded video in the NetPDA NetCell Client s regular view tap the Full Screen icon to switch to a full screen rotated view ak T E El G P Tj a pu T rip As an alternative to tapping the Full Screen icon simply tap anywhere inside the regular view s live image area When in full screen view tap anywhere inside the live image area to return to regular view Returning to the Camera List Page To return to the came
76. 3 GB switching is likely to help prevent the problems from occurring The way to configure 32 bit Windows to be LARGEADDRESSAWARE depends on your type of Windows operating system In the following you will see to methods outlining Microsoft s recommended procedure for increasing the per process memory limit to 3 GB Use the first method if running Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003 Use the second method if running Windows 2008 Server Windows Vista Business Windows Vista Enterprise or Windows Vista Ultimate 220 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual 3 GB Switching What to Do If Running Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003 IMPORTANT mproper modification of boot ini can render the operating system inoperable OnSSI does not assume any responsibility for changes you make to the operating system Adding the 3 GB Switch The following technique can be used to add the 3 GB switch to the boot ini file From a command prompt enter the following to add the 3 GB switch to the end of the first line of the operating system section in the boot ini file requires administrative privileges BOOTCFG RAW 3GB A ID 1 Where e RAW specifies the operating system options for the boot entry The previous operating system options will be modified e 3GB specifies the 3 GB switch e A specifies that the operating system options entered with the RAW switch will be appended to the existing opera
77. Administrator window When deciding which access client solution is the best choice for your organization you may find it helpful to review the following Assess Your Organization s Needs Note Systems and requirements differ from organization to organization The following questions and answers are thus for guidance only Do you require a handheld solution e Yes Use the NetPDA NetCell Client Server solution If required you can of course combine the PDA solution with other remote access solutions such as NetGuard EVS e No Determine your needs based on the questions and answers provided in the following Is it acceptable to install client software on remote users computers e Yes Use Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS e No Use NetGuard remote users run NetGuard straight from the NetDVMS server Will you require a large amount of future flexibility from your remote access solution e Yes Use Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS Due to the way the software has been developed these clients offers a high degree of flexibility for integration of new features plugins etc e No Use NetGuard Do you require a very feature rich client application e Yes Use Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS These clients offer considerably more features for remote users than the other solutions e No Use NetGuard Do you require a large amount of flexibility re remote users ability to export data e Yes Use NetGuard EVS NetGuar
78. CE on your keyboard a Click the Add button to add the host to the list of Allowed Hosts b Repeat for each required host Orip If you later want to remove a host from the list simply select the unwanted host in the list then click the Delete button 6 Now you are able to customize the behavior of your NetMatrix Monitor application you do this by adjusting settings in the window s Run Mode section Grip The NetMatrix Monitor application is pre configured with typically required behavior settings marked by default in the following list You do not need to adjust the settings listed in this step unless you want to customize the way your NetMatrix 203 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual NetMatrix Monitor Monitor application should behave consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt e Always On Top If selected default this setting forces the NetMatrix Monitor window on top of other windows This setting can subsequently be changed from a menu accessible by right clicking inside the NetMatrix Monitor window e Auto Accept All Commands If selected default this setting will make your NetMatrix Monitor application automatically accept all commands received from allowed hosts provided the commands are accompanied by the correct password If this setting is not used a dialog in the NetMatrix Monitor window will prompt you to accept each received command e Display Camera Info I
79. Event window for editing event buttons contains the following fields Button Read only field displaying the name of the camera for which the related to event button has been specified If the field displays Global the event button is a global event button available for all cameras Manual Lets you edit the name of the event button event name Note Event button names must not contain the following characters lt gt Send e mail Select check box to send an e mail alert when the event button is if this event clicked occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert 123 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is image from selected camera Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event button is clicked in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Send SMS if Select check box to send an SMS alert when the event button is this event clicked occurs Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window Generic Events NetDVMS is able to analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and automatically trigger an event when specified criteria are met This way you are able to easily i
80. HEMOVEINETMA TRAD is 224 NetPDA NetCell Server Removal ProCequre ccccccccccccccnonococonnnnnncnnononnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnrrnnnnnnnnncnnennanennos 224 NetPDA NetCell Client Removal Procedure cccooooccnccccccocnoconncnnonnnccnnnnnnonnncnnnnnnonnnrrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnonnnrrnnennnnns 224 Removing the NetPDA NetCell Client Directly from the PDA o coooonccnncncccnoccnnnnnnonnnconnnnnnonannnnnnnononrnnnnnnnonananennnnnos 224 Removing the NetPDA NetCell Client from a PC with ActiVeSyNC ccccccococononncononnnnnnnonnnnnnnnannnonnnnonnnnnnnonnnnancnncnnos 225 HOW TO AP A tevcces ee EE cee eee een ta tee tees see tae cutee btecatece 226 ADMINISTRA TO Ron AA A A a a 226 Genee EVO SAS ASS ee e 228 CONO Ta Dren A eae nn Fre fete eee ee OE RE eee PR ee 244 VOT AD ranita Sette ev ete cece ccs os eae a a aeeenec tec eee eae 246 DATABASES iaa aaa 251 Power Qliages Use a UPS a as tot as heat Dic the ac a 251 Windows Task Manager Be Careful when Ending Processes ccccccsseeeeeeceeeaueeeeeeeeesaeeseeeeeeeseaseeeeeessaanseeeeess 251 Hard Disk Failure Protect Your Drive ccccccessccceccceeseseeeeceeeesseceeseaneuseeeeseneaesaeeeeseseaaseeeesesaasseeeeeessssnagsseeesesanees 252 REMOVING THE DOWNLOAD MANAGER ccccccenseceseecnseecnsecensecensecenseoesseeasenensenensecenseonseseneeoes 252 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Welcome Examples of User Accessible Feature
81. Happens During Dynamic Archiving If the drive on which the camera stores its regular database is among the drives you have selected for dynamic archiving archiving for the camera in question will always take place to that drive first If the drive on which the camera stores its regular database is or becomes full or if it is simply not among the drives selected for dynamic archiving archiving will take place to the selected drive with the most free disk space Which drive that is may change during the archiving process and archiving 74 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output may therefore happen to several drives during the same process However that has no impact on how you find and view archived recordings Note If you use a drive for both recording and archiving archiving to that drive will only take place from cameras recording to that drive In that case you should select one or more other drives for archiving so that archiving from other databases will also take place Alternatively you should avoid using the same drive for both recording and archiving Important If you have more that one surveillance server each surveillance server must archive to its own mapped location in order for archiving to work If you try to archive to the same mapped location from all the servers archiving will not work Archiving Audio If audio is enabled on a device audio from the device wil
82. Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual 3 GB Switching Enter the following command to add the 3 GB switch to the current operating system boot entry BCDEDIT SET INCREASEUSERVA 3072 Where e USERVA Specifies an alternate amount of user mode virtual address space for operating systems e 3072 Specifies 3 GB 3072 MB A reboot is required after editing the boot configuration data store for the changes to take effect Removing the 3GB Switch Select Start gt All Programs gt Accessories right click Command Prompt and select Run as administrator then click Continue Enter the following command to remove the 3 GB switch from the current operating system boot entry BCDEDIT DELETEVALUE INCREASEUSERVA A reboot is required after editing the boot configuration data store for the changes to take effect 222 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Removal Removal Entire System To remove the entire NetDVMS surveillance system i e the surveillance server software and related installation files the video device drivers the Download Manager the Viewer and client software from your server do the following what happens to our recordings Your recordings will not be removed they will remain on the server even after the server software has been removed Likewise the NetDVMS configuration file will remain on the server this allows you to reuse your configuration if you later install NetDVMS again 1 Shut do
83. Input Events amp Output Field Button Description Port Enable Outside Access Outside Address Outside Port Local IP Ranges Lets you specify a port number to use for the server The default port number is 80 You are able to change the default port number Select the check box if the server should be accessible from the internet via a router or firewall If selecting this option also specify the outside public IP address and port number in the Outside Address and Outside Port fields Note When using outside access the router or firewall used must be configured so requests sent to the outside public IP address and port are forwarded to the inside local IP address and port of the server running the Image Server service Lets you specify a public IP address or hostname for use when the server should be available from the internet Lets you specify a port number for use when the server should be available from the internet The default port number is 80 You are able to change the default port number Opens the Define local IP ranges window in which you are able to define IP address ranges which the Image Server should recognize as coming from a local network Background When an OnSSI client connects to a surveillance system an amount of initial data communication including the exchange of contact IP addresses goes on in the background completely automatically and transparent to users Howeve
84. LC do the following to enter the new SLC in the Administrator application 1 2 Click the icon in the left corner of the Administrator window s title bar Clicking the icon gives you access to a access to a small menu Select About Adm from the menu Miane Close Alt F4 In the Software License Code field overwrite the existing SLC with the new one When ready click OK Close the Administrator application by clicking the Exit button When you start the Administrator application again the new SLC will take effect Note In order to write in the Software License Code filed the Recording Server service must be paused see Service Manager Window or stopped see Using the Recording Server Manager 260
85. MS server itself is additional installation required Very flexible configuration through the Image Server Administrator and Download Manager includes master Slaves handling handling of local IP address ranges language versions etc Very flexible choice of creating dedicated user accounts or Importing users and groups of users from Active Directory rights for accessing individual client and camera features can be determined on a per user or per group basis Limited NET based thus offering a high degree of flexibility for 176 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Two Access Clients at a ET TAS Plugins Recommended Use NetGuard EVS NetGuard Systems on which installation of client software is not desirable Systems on which a NET client solution is not desirable Systems on which the Active Directory support lets you leverage existing user accounts NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients NetGuard EVS integration of new features plugins etc Systems on which a high degree of flexibility e g use of remote access plugin features will be required Systems on which a NET client solution is desirable Systems on which the Active Directory support lets you leverage existing user accounts NetGuard EVS provides remote users with extremely feature rich access to the surveillance system Grip See system requirements for NetGuard EVS under System Reguirements NetGuard EVS must be installed
86. NetMatrix recipients The commands typically tell the NetMatrix recipient to connect to or disconnect from video feeds from a particular cameras In the following you will find information about installing the NetMatrix Monitor application configuring the NetMatrix Monitor Application and day to day use of the NetMatrix Monitor application Note Read the License Terms on the Product License Sheet enclosed with the software DVD before installing the NetMatrix Monitor application Since the NetMatrix Monitor software communicates directly with cameras it is important that NetMatrix Monitor users download and install the latest video device drivers see Updating Video Device Drivers To install the NetMatrix Monitor application do the following 1 Insert the NetDVMS software DVD wait for a short while select required language then click the Install NetMatrix Monitor link Alternatively if you are installing a version downloaded from the internet run the file Monitor exe from the location you have saved it to Grip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings 201 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual NetMatrix Monitor Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software When this is the case click the Run button 2 When the installation wizard starts click Next to continue the installation 3 Read and accept the License Agreeme
87. New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events contains the following fields Box External Lets you specify a name for the particular input event event name Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt Soe eye ec A Note Some camera devices only support event names of a certain length and or with a certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details Send email Select check box to send an e mail alert when the input occurs if this event occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is image from selected camera Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the input event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box 113 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Box Send SMS if Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs this event occurs Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window Add New Output The Add New Output window lets you specify the settings for an output on a device add Hara Che pat eal gm Eternal oia corria iy Pore Dira dj arre Bed or pr a L
88. PDA NetCell Server First Step IIS Port Configuration Before you begin installing the NetPDA NetCell Server you must configure IIS to use the port number on which the NetPDA NetCell Server is going to run e In Windows Start menu select Run e Inthe Open field type inetmgr exe and click OK This will display the Internet Information Services dialog 186 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients O In the left part of the dialog expand the computer tem until you see the Default Web Site item E brimi himo FEF El JRA local computer 2 Web Sites Example only details enlarged for clarity computer name is likely to be different on your server Right click the Default Web Site item and select Properties This will open the Default Web Site Properties dialog On the dialog s Web Site tab set the TCP Port number to the number that NetPDA NetCell Server is going to use the default port for the NetPDA NetCell Server is 8080 then click OK Default Web Site Properties Directoy Secunty HATTF Hades Duim Eno aeb Sim a Filas y Horse Direccion Donar as Se erid a Lieponpeon haig eb Site F Aiai AN y ha Agrarced TCP Pest Ela Corer Caeci Titel El HTTP Esepa lreeo Erabled el Enable Logging Pelea lo boreal WC Extended Log File Formal me Properties e Back in the Internet Information Services dialog verify that IIS is running If IIS i
89. PO ROT 40 AU rd A Aa 40 A ates Mane dc ae latecuatee so arees does A merece heals ks 41 Motion Detecta A ea i aeaio a i Aa a a A 41 Database SENJ S iS A OA 41 Database Resist ia Dah eee Ni 44 Mage QUIM tr A NA E 44 EVEN E INQUNCA OS A A io ene acca 44 OUTDUIS ainsi ecteenct cage AE AA A comm ucbedoamemanuenumenctaden 44 PTZRreset Positions PTZ Cameras Only ens bales a a T aia 45 Editing Gamera Name NUMDE caniae a N a A N A 45 EVEN TINO IICA OASIS eaten 46 Whats arn EventiNotlicalOn eiii 46 Specifying Events for which Event Notification Should Be Used oooooocccccccccccccccoccconcnccccncncncnnnnnnnnnancncnnnnnnncnncnnnnnnnos 46 EI AIDA dd 47 Fisheye WMeWwiAQUSIMO Nalda da 48 Previewing the Fisheye VIEW a 48 a A ed eee 49 Moton Deterioro e 49 NES 8 O APPO PC7 0 OO A 50 MAMI E cia 51 Define Exclusion Regions WIN O Weiss la did ai 51 Defining Areas in which Motion Detection Should Be Disabled ccccconoonnonccccccnnnococononononancncnnnnnoncncnononnnnnanancnnos 51 Define Exclusion Regions Window s Buttons and Check BOX8S ooocccccccccoooconcccnononccnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnonnnrennnnnnnnns 52 MES A A IS O O II icattitah treatable 52 Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected Motion occccccccccccoccnnnnonnnnnnnononononanoncnncnnnnnnnnononnnnnnannnnnos 53 APRA A 54 WAVUSS PreserPoOS ION erara a li doi 55 Absolute and Relative Positioning PTZ Cameras ccccssssssssecceeeeececeseensesseeeee
90. Perder Bat Door Ext ira Esck Door West Wiig Ereni Oboe Can Motion on Back Door West Wing Camera b rear w Tr Tr In this example the selected event is detected motion on a particular camera Note that if available you are also able to select other types of event including input events generic events VMD events event buttons including global event buttons and timer events When you select an event it will initially be highlighted by a red exclamation mark El Alar Ceria Dip The exclamation mark indicates that there is additional configuration to be done 3 Now right click the event to select which action should take place when the event occurs ES Sas Cera Di pla 1 Motion on Back Doo Wes Wino Camera b Delete Motion om Beck Door West Wir Camera b Connect Dicarnmect Hen Comet Dirun You have three actions to choose from e Connect Connect to the camera you will specify the actual camera in the next step e Disconnect then connect Disconnect any existing connection to the camera you will specify the actual camera in the next step then connect again This option is useful because NetMatrix recipients are often able to show live video from more than one event in which case the live video will appear in the NetMatrix recipient on a first in first out basis Each time a new event occurs video from the latest event is displayed prominently in a specific position on the NetMatrix recipient while at th
91. Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information External Lets you specify a name for the output The name will appear on the output button list with which users will be able to manually trigger the name output Note Output names must not contain the following characters lt gt S N Note Some camera devices only support output names of a certain length and or with a certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details Testing the Defined Output When you have defined settings for the output in question you are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button Edit Output Window The Edit Output window lets you specify the settings for an output on a device Edil Cp A EJ Leer dd ria h Eki Es rpad i rre el ur diad l prg sadga har PE ei lira shad cae ajii ur Pd shad Ds Corn ri The Edit Output window JAccess You access the Edit Output window by selecting the required output in the O Setup window then clicking the Edit selected button 115 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Edit Output Window s Fields The Edit Output window contains the following fields Field Description External output connected to Output connected on Keep output for External output name Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the output event is defined L
92. Server Administrator window Grip There is no feature for editing an already defined IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window However you can simply select the range in question in the Define local IP ranges window s list delete it by clicking the Delete button and then simply add a new range reflecting your requirements Slave Servers The Image Server Administrator s Slave Administration window lets you define all servers required to run as Slave servers under the NetDVMS server you are configuring Remember that only one server can be the master server Any number of servers can be defined as Slave servers under the master server 94 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Slave Admini tration E Dimai Sled Hemara Fia Lape jii r a TEATA TAT Cisa Access You access the Slave Administration window by clicking the Slaves button in the mage Server Administrator window Adding a Slave Server To add a slave server click the Slave Administration window s Add Slave button specify the host name of the slave server specify the required port number and click OK This will add the slave server to the Slave Administration window s list of slave servers Grip Instead of specifying a host name when adding a slave server you may specify the IP address of the slave server Simply type the IP address in the Hostname field when adding the slave server R
93. The ability to associate a microphone and or a speaker with the selected camera requires that at least one microphone and or speaker has been attached to a device on the surveillance system When a microphone and or a speaker is associated with a camera audio from the source will automatically be used when video from the camera is viewed Note that you are able to select a microphone and or a speaker attached to another device than the selected camera To associate a microphone and or a speaker with the selected camera simply select the required microphone and or speaker from the Default microphone and Default speaker lists 40 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output For cameras attached to the same device as a microphone and or a speaker the microphone and or speaker is automatically selected and cannot be changed Fisheye Note Functionality in the Fisheye section is only available if the use of fisheye lens technology for 360 viewing has been enabled for the device to which the camera is attached For dedicated fisheye cameras the use of fisheye technology is automatically enabled If not dealing with a dedicated fisheye camera you enable use of fisheye technology for a device in the Edit device settings window accessed by selecting the required device in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then clicking the Administrator window s Edit Device button The Fisheye sec
94. This method does not work for NetPDA NetCell Client users Using Active Directory requires that a server with Active Directory installed and acting as domain controller is available on your network What Is Active Directory Active Directory is a distributed directory service included with several Windows Server operating systems it identifies resources on a network in order for users or applications to access them Users and if required groups of users are specified centrally in Active Directory In short the benefits of importing user data from Active Directory are that Administrators do not have to create separate user accounts for accessing the surveillance system because user authentication will be handled centrally by Active Directory Administrators can import groups of users In one go if required Users can basically just use their Windows login when accessing the surveillance system no need to memorize separate user names and passwords Prerequisites The Image Server managing the remote access verifies NetGuard EVS Client users identities using NTLM challenge handshake with a Microsoft Domain Controller In order to be able to import users and groups through Active Directory a server with Active Directory installed and acting as domain controller must be available on your network Consult your network administrator if in doubt User and Group Concepts Active Directory uses the concepts of users and groups USERS Use
95. VMS 6 5f User Manual How to Grip There is no feature for editing an already defined IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window However you can simply select the range in question in the Define local IP ranges window s list delete it by clicking the Delete button and then simply add a new range reflecting your requirements The Image Server Administrator s User administration window lets you define access client users Access You access the User administration window by clicking the User Setup button in the Image Server Administrator window You are able to add new users in two ways which may be combined e Basic user Lets you create a dedicated surveillance system user account with basic user name and password authentication for each individual user If the NetPDA NetCell Server is installed this method works for NetPDA NetCell Client users e Windows user Lets you import individual users or groups defined locally on the server or users groups from Active Directory and authenticate them based on their Windows login This method does not work for NetPDA NetCell Client users Using Active Directory requires that a server with Active Directory installed and acting as domain controller is available on your network 259 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to SLC Software License Code If you have upgraded your NetDVMS or otherwise acquired a new Software License Code S
96. Windows Task Manager Be Careful when Ending Processes 251 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to When working in Windows Task Manager be careful not to end any processes which affect the Surveillance system If you end an application or system service by clicking End Process in the Windows Task Manager the process in question will not be given the chance to save its state or data before it is terminated This may in turn lead to corrupt camera databases Windows Task Manager will typically display a warning if you attempt to end a process Unless you are absolutely sure that ending the process will not affect the surveillance system make sure you click the No button when the warning message asks you if you really want to terminate the process Hard Disk Failure Protect Your Drives Hard disk drives are mechanical devices and as such they are vulnerable to external factors The following are examples of external factors which may damage hard disk drives and lead to corrupt camera databases e Vibration make sure the surveillance system server and its surroundings are stable e Strong heat make sure the server has adequate ventilation e Strong magnetic fields avoid e Power outages make sure you use a UPS see more information in the previous e Static electricity make sure you ground yourself if you are going to handle a hard disk drive e Fire water etc avoid Removing the Download Manager
97. a fipa 1 rl ii el fp Lor quad rea Sd ara Ha A AA Lal parra Ll DS d Pei Y O CE tea The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only JAccess You access the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only by selecting the required device and clicking the Add new event button in the O Setup window Note that this only applies when the selected device is capable of handling a single input event only Some devices are capable of handling several input events in which case a different window the Multiple Input Events window will open when the Add new event button is clicked Note Before you specify input events for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the NetDVMS release note to verify that input controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used Add New Event Window s Fields The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only contains the following fields Box External Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the sensor input event is defined connected to Sensor Lets you select which of the device s input ports the sensor used for connected the input event is connected to through Event Lets you select whether input event should be trig
98. a shortcut numbers are only used in NetGuard EVS In other applications such as Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard the camera shortcuts cannot be used Tip More information about using the keyboard shortcuts is available in the documentation for NetGuard EVS 45 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Event Notifications Note The use of event notifications requires that at least one event has been specified for a device on your NetDVMS system the event does not have to be specified for the particular camera The Setup Notifications on Events window lets you select events for triggering event notifications for the camera when displayed in NetGuard and NetGuard EVS Access You access the Setup Notifications on Events window from the Camera settings for Device Name Camera Name window by clicking the Event Notifications button What Is an Event Notification In NetGuard or NetGuard EVS three differently colored indicators are available for each camera a yellow indicator a red indicator and a green indicator When event notification is used for a camera the yellow indicator will light up when the specified events have occurred Event notifications can be valuable for camera operators as they will be able to quickly detect that an event has occurred even though their focus was perhaps on something else the moment the event occurred Yellow indicator in clients is used for
99. a small amount of data to the required IP address in order to see if it responds The word ping it is said was chosen because it mirrors the sound of a sonar How do I ping To ping an IP address do the following In Windows Start menu select Run In the Open field type cmd and click OK This will open a command prompt window Now type ping followed by the required IP address example ping 123 123 123 123 then press ENTER on your keyboard If the pinged IP address is available you will see a reply message and some simple statistics see example illustration 1 if the IP address does not respond you will typically see a Request timed out message see example illustration 2 191 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc CAWMDOWS ayitem Jemi em cr pi a 18 10 67 4 d LA Un 14 104 67 with 4 byte ss Fran 1018 69 47 bytes 32 i Fran 10 10 67 41 hbytoz 32 y from 18 18 69 4 hyte Fep La Freon 19 1H A E hate Fiag statistics For 10 10 69 47 Packstet Sant 41 Ante iva 4 Ci loser ipproximate round trip tires in milli seconds j Hinin Bas Maximan Bos Average Bro I CAWNDOWS ayitem I 2 cmd exe Gripping 18 78 67 1AA Fimging 104 108 67 100 with 42 byte E timed ic E imid owt E tired owt t timed owt thy statistics For 10 180 69 160 F eater art 41 Ante ive Example 2 Unsuccessful pinging ping request times out Example 1 Successful pinging pinged IP address replies NetDVMS 6 5f User
100. abase o Always Always store all received video in the database o Never Never store any received video in the database Live video will be displayed but since no video is kept in the database users will not be able to browse video from the camera o Conditionally Store received video in the database when certain conditions are met When you select this option specify required conditions in the following fields e On motion Available only when the option Conditionally is selected i e when video received from the camera should be stored in the database on 39 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output certain conditions only Select the check box to store all video in which motion is detected e On event Available only when the option Conditionally is selected i e when video received from the camera should be stored in the database on certain conditions only Select the check box to store all video regardless of motion when an external event occurs and until another external event occurs then select required start and stop events in the Start and Stop lists Use of storage on event requires that events have been defined Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output e Number of seconds pre post recordings on event Available only when the option Conditional is selected i e when video received from the camera should be stored in the database on certain condi
101. able to users In the example only English versions are initially listed This Is because the example is from an English version of NetDVMS had you installed a Japanese version only Japanese versions would initially be listed In the example NetDVMS has been installed an English language version The fact that only standard features are initially available and only in the same language version as the surveillance system itself helps reduce installation time and save space on the server There is 254 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to Simply no need to have a feature or language version available on the server if nobody is going to use it You can however easily make more features and or languages available as required See Making New Features Available in the following for more information Making New Features Available Making new features including new language versions available to your organization s users involves two procedures First you install the required features on the surveillance system server You then use the Download Manager to fine tune which features should be available in the various language versions of the welcome page Installing New Features on Server If the Download Manager is open close it before installing new features on the server Installation files for NetGuard EVS language versions language packs etc are by default available on your surveillance system s
102. ailable Input Event s Enabled Input Event s gt gt lt lt Edit Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the input events are defined Lists available input events for the device typically with an input event for rising and falling signals on each of the device s input ports For exact information about what constitutes the various input events refer to documentation for the sensors and device in question my list contains event related to motion and or object detection what s this Some devices have their own capabilities for detecting motion and or moving static objects A motion or object detection related input event is very likely to be an option from such a device The settings determining this kind of detection are configured on the device itself typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address For more information refer to the documentation for the device in question Lists enabled input events for the device You enable an event by selecting it in the Available Input Event s list then clicking the gt gt button See description in the following You enable an event by selecting it in the Available Input Event s list then clicking the gt gt button to open the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events in which you specify a name for the input event and any e mail or SMS alerts to be associated with it
103. all users 90 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Restricted Access To use restricted access select Restrict user access Then click the User Access button to open the Define User Rights window in which you define access rights for each user Master Slave Setup Section You are able to create a master slave setup of NetDVMS servers A master slave setup will allow remote users to transparently connect to more than one server simultaneously When remote users connect to the master server they will instantly get access to the slave servers as well How many master servers can use in a master slave setup An unlimited number of servers per SLC Software License Code specified during installation can be designated as master servers If required for example if your organization is very large and spread over many geographical locations or in case you want to create a redundancy solution this allows you to use several master servers in a master slave setup How many slave servers can use in a master slave setup An unlimited number of servers can be defined as slave servers under a designated master server using the same Software License Code Note When using a master slave setup remote users and their rights must be defined in the Image Server Administrator window on the master server as well as on each of the slave servers Note Only cameras to which a remote user has be
104. amp Output To define a timer event do the following 1 A timer event requires that an input event VMD event generic event or event button has already been defined Begin by selecting the required event or event button e If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Input or VMD Event Click the Administrator window s I O Setup button to open the I O Setup window In the I O Setup window s Defined events list click the plus sign H next to the required device select the required input or VMD event then click the Add new event button to open the New Timer window e If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Event Button Click the Administrator window s Event Buttons button to open the Event Buttons window In the Event Buttons window s Defined Events list select the required event button then click the Add new event button to open the New Timer window e If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Generic Event Click the Administrator window s Generic Events button to open the Generic Events window In the Generic Events window s Defined Events list select the required generic event then click the Add new event button to open the New Timer window 2 Inthe New Timer window the Timer event is started by field will show the name of the selected event or event button tirar Timar Ed Tire red ri ij liy Ermi gui I T ap Pub Tra everd eeue often J Pmt H rih OF Cancel Now specify info
105. ap OK to store the configuration You are now ready to use your NetPDA NetCell Client see Using the NetPDA NetCell Client for more information The NetPDA NetCell Client is used for viewing live and recorded video from the NetDVMS surveillance system on a PDA Starting the NetPDA NetCell Client You start the NetPDA NetCell Client by tapping your PDA s Start button selecting Programs then tapping the NetPDA NetCell Client icon Logging In to the NetPDA NetCell Client You start the NetPDA NetCell Client by tapping your PDA s Start button selecting Programs then tapping the NetPDA NetCell Client icon Viewing Live Video From the NetPDA NetCell Client s camera list page you have access to viewing live video 193 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients Camera list page Selecting a Camera for Live Viewing In the camera list select the required camera Tap the LIVE button You will now see live video from the selected camera in the NetPDA NetCell Client s regular view in which about half of the display is available for viewing the video If you require a better view of the video you can easily switch to full screen view this is described in the following 194 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients Full Screen View When viewing live video in the NetPDA NetCell Client s regular view tap the Full Screen icon to switch to a full s
106. as a cite g bl Cove am hram niler Pham Fi cmp y daa lr ide ta Pee eir ieii Es das f Fada a a y vei rar mip This will open the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window In the All Outputs list in the window s left side select the required output then click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list Cehpin Seitings der Siaire Carrara Ciara cta Del bir Depar lefa Has See Digas 1 aro rd This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list which lists all outputs avallable for manual control when viewing live video from the camera in question Good to know e You are not limited to selecting output connected to the camera itself If output has been defined on other cameras devices on the NetDVMS system this output will also be selectable in the All Outputs list e An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way e If you have specified several outputs in the On Manual Control list you are able to control the sequence in which the outputs will be displayed in the OnSSI client By using the up and down buttons located to the right of the list you can change a selected output s position in the sequence e The Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window also lets you select output for automatic triggering on detected motion This is further described in How to 154 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Ma
107. as well as on each of the slave servers e Outside Access has been enabled on all involved servers and ports mapped accordingly in the routers or firewalls used if the slave servers are to be accessed from the internet Removing a Slave Server To remove a slave server from the Slave Administration window s list of slave servers select the slave server in the list and click the Delete Slave button The Define local IP ranges window lets you define IP address ranges which the Image Server should recognize as coming from a local network Define lecal P ranges Egl add Delete q E Range er Ciya Access You access the Define local IP ranges window by clicking the Local IP Ranges button in the Image Server Administrator window To define a local IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window do the following 1 Specify the beginning of the IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window s first field and the end of the IP address range in the second field 2 Click the Add button The IP address range will be added to the list in the lower part of the Define local IP ranges window You may define as many local IP address ranges as required If required an IP address range may include only one IP address example 192 168 10 1 192 168 10 1 3 When ready click the Define local IP ranges window s Close button to return to the Image Server Administrator window 258 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetD
108. as well as the required main event to see the timer event Click OK to return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the timer event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS 151 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output How to Add a Manually Controlled Output Output e g lights sirens etc connected to cameras or other devices can be triggered manually when viewing live video in NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard EVS e In an OnSSI client output may be triggered by selecting the required output from a list on the client s Live tab The output does not necessarily have to be physically connected to the specific camera from which a NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite NetGuard EVS user views live video the output can be connected to any device on your NetDVMS system To add an output for manual control do the following Note In the following it is assumed that the required output unit has been connected to the output port on the required camera or other device but that it has not yet been defined on your NetDVMS system If you have already defined the output on your system begin at step 5 1 Inthe Administrator window click the I O Setup button This will open the I O Setup window 2 Inthe I O Setup window first select the camera or other device to which the output unit is connected then
109. ations than the Default Archiving Directory oooooocnncccnnnncncccnnonnnnncnnnnnnnnnononononononos 66 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Welcome ARCHIVING AU GIO reesi E tnsnqnecanianat ame a 66 Storage Capacity Required for Archiving sscccccceecececesaeseeeeeececeeeseseseaueeseuseseeeeeeeeesesuaueaseseseeeeeeeeeeeseseaaaaenees 66 Automatic Response if Running Out of Disk Space eee ek 67 Backind UO ATCHIVES srt do 68 Viewing Archived Recordihg S marina irc llana 69 Virus Scanning and AL CIV INI a A 69 New Database Arcniving Falls uasasina Aa 69 ALCOI SCID WIN COW setenta ara E A aaranausuctia AE Moisteutie dd esiees 70 PIG GS IB e e e e tie al tas ite eect 70 Stet ANG IM INO 2s caste PP E o leet aa E AE E E AAT e tc E AE A T E derce hs E AE 73 DIMamic Arcades acacia 74 What Happens During Dynamic Are Vine a 74 ARCHIVING AUGO pesones 75 AUDIO dt ds 15 Microphone Settings WIN IO Witt ti n 76 Speaker setings WINDOW auction 76 DOWNLOAD MANAGER ACCESS CLIENT AVAILABILITY cccssseccceeseeecensseecensseeseenseeseenseessoees 77 Examples of User Accessible Features 1 A ai 77 What Does the Welcome Page Look Like ooonnccncccccoccnnconcccnonoocconcnnonanccnncnnnonnncrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnonnrannnnnnnnnnannraness 77 ITA EVA TO es cas ese esc E stn ects eich fa cb E E ties teea cate eacn at 77 Default Configuration of Download Manager ccccccccecececeeeceeeeeeeee
110. ator window 5 Inthe Administrator window first select the camera for which the output should be available then click the Settings button This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 6 Inthe Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Outputs button Caen Serine Wav il Camas Ed kegay h r DETE a Pelee rad Ao mr 7 e ira m La sed joa Fe adi ro ar pry n hdp Jer rro ts ja di AD Paki qeda Code eier F iera an iy on eee n a mb 3 tora iter erer Dorema gt rapi y m inate ti Hinar eimo ff a feted e Ge are Ca Ta E Mas rece e di T Has Dri alar CT dea ra Pa a a bal i ogee of data lr ide e Par mis This will open the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 7 Inthe All Outputs list in the window s left side select the required output then click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list 232 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to Disip Settings der Sait Canepa 1 Chats bbc Ce pea dl Depas befor He 50m Dias 1 lao rd This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list which lists all outputs available for manual control when viewing live video from the camera in question Good to know e You are not limited to selecting output connected to the camera itself If outp
111. azsescanet snsonteveans sang oiacane Pacasgraauaaors O 177 OGULARIS CLIENT LITE una bi is 179 istalind Oculalis letter E EN E 179 Removing Octilaris Client LWE aiei Sees aeea EE eiia A EETA 179 a bad ated agen ae eee 179 INET GUARD e a ase 180 Accessing NetGuard sarao ado 181 NETPDA NETGELL CLIENT amp SERVER cui 182 INGER DAVINGIG Cll CIV CMa sates ii diodo 182 ie on PA asc eaten cats see eet wat a eae cece ols oe nde ate EER 183 MODA o Eno 183 INSTALLING IIS AND NET FRAMEWORK ooocccccccccoccnnnnconnnncononnnnnnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnrrrrnnnnnaaannrrrrnnannnas 183 SMA di 183 NET Framework VENCIO dd a do 184 Allowing Use of NET Framework Windows 2003 Only oooooooncccccccccccccccnononncncnccncnoncnnnnnnnnnananccccnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnanancnns 185 NET Framework Reis tato AS 186 Installing the NetPDA NetCell Severin id A do 186 Verifying the NetPDA NetCell Server Installati0D ooo oooooononnccccnocononcccccoccnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnrnr EnEn En Ennn 188 NetPDA NetCell Server Installation Troubleshooting coccccccnnccccooccononanoconnnnnonononononnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnrnnnnenennnnnnnos 190 Installing the NetP DA NetC ell Clica oia 191 Checking the Wireless CONNECTION serraria are a aeaa aa e EE aa ENa OE eaa iea a Eaa EAEAN Aail 191 Starting and Configuring the NetPDA NetCell Client oooooconnonncnconnnnnnccnononnnnnnnconcnnnnoncnonnnnnnnnrnnencnnnnnnnnonnnonnnos 192 Starting te NeiPDA NEICell Che st sides 193 Leggi
112. base for the camera will be permanently deleted As a security measure you will be asked to confirm that you want to permanently delete all stored records for the camera Records stored in archived databases will not be affected Note If the Recording Server service is running the button will not be available To make the button available pause the Recording Server service by clicking the Administrator window s Service Manager button then clicking the Pause button or by stopping the service from the Recording Server Manager icon IMPORTANT No video or audio will be recorded while the Recording Server service IS paused or stopped e Archive automatically when database is full Select this check box if you wish to automatically archive the database when it is full Note For this feature to work you should first enable archiving in the Archive Setup Window e Delete archives older than n days 0 to use default archive setting In this field you can specify after how many days archives for the camera should be deleted Note What you specify here overwrites what you have specified in the Archive Setup Window Type O to use same number of days as specified the Archive Setup window e Database path Specify which local directory the database for the camera should be kept in Example C videodata To browse for a folder click the browse button next to the Database path field 42 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5
113. bed in the following topics Installing Configuring the NetPDA NetCell Server Installing Configuring the NetPDA NetCell Client and Using the NetPDA NetCell Client The NetPDA NetCell Server is installed on an Internet Information Services IIS server and is used as a front end to the NetDVMS system s Image Server The NetPDA NetCell Server handles login and session requests between the NetPDA NetCell Client and the Image Server The NetPDA NetCell Server also handles resizing of surveillance video to fit the screen layout of the NetPDA NetCell Client Before the NetPDA NetCell Server can be installed on a server Internet Information Services IIS and Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 version 1 1 4322 or later must be installed and configured on the server Installing IIS and NET Framework To Install IIS and NET Framework on the server do the following IIS Installation Note The following procedure describes IIS installation on Windows XP If you are using Windows 2000 Server or Windows 2003 Server IIS and NET Framework are normally installed during the installation of the operating system 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel then Add or Remove Programs 2 In the left part of the Add or Remove Programs dialog click Add Remove Windows Components This will open the Windows Components Wizard 3 In the wizard s Components list select Internet Information Services 11S and click Next 183 On Net Surveillan
114. ber to use when logging in to NetGuard In most circumstances port 80 is used e Authentication Select required authentication method o Windows current user with which you will be authenticated through your current Windows login and do not have to specify any user name or password This is the default authentication method i e the method which is automatically used unless you select another method o Windows with which you will be authenticated through your Windows login but you will need to type your Windows user name and password o Basic with which you will be authenticated through a user password combination defined on the surveillance system server e Username Type your user name The user name Is case sensitive i e there is a difference between typing for example amanda and Amanda e Password Type your password The password is case sensitive 181 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients 3 Click the Login link After a short wait you get access to NetGuard Content in NetGuard is grouped on three tabs Live Browse and Setup iwe Browse Setup The Live tab is used for viewing live video from cameras the Browse tab is used for finding and playing back recorded video and the Setup tab is used for configuring NetGuard 4where can find more information about NetGuard Refer to NetGuard User s Manual available on the NetDVMS software DVD NetPDA NetCell Client a
115. bit colors Adapter Software Microsoft Windows Pocket PC 2003 2003 SE Mobile 5 0 NetMatrix Monitor Operating Microsoft Windows XP Professional 32 bit or 64 bit and System Windows Server 2003 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Business 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit and Windows Vista Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit CPU Intel Pentium 4 2 4 GHz or higher RAM Minimum 512 Mbyte 1 GB recommended on Microsoft Windows Vista Network Ethernet 100 Mbit or higher recommended Graphics AAGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 16 bit colors 15 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual System Requirements Adapter Hard Disk Minimum 50 Mbyte free Space Software DirectX 9 0 or newer Running as a 32 bit service application Grip To check which DirectX version is installed on a computer click Start select Run and type dxdiag When you click OK the DirectX Diagnostic Tool window will open version information is displayed near the bottom of its System tab Should the server require a DirectX update the latest versions of DirectX are available from http www microsoft com downloads If you wish to install configure and run NetDVMS on a Windows Vista computer it is important that you have administrator rights If you only have standard user rights you will not be able to configure the surveillance system The restrictions are applied by the so called User Account
116. ble only if Moveable is selected in the Camera Type field 36 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Field Description Lets you specify port address of the camera The port address would normally be O or 1 If using daisy chained PTZ cameras the port address will identify each of them and you Should verify your settings with those recommended in the cameras manuals Cameras In NetDVMS you do not have to worry about having to add individual cameras to the system Cameras are connected to devices so once you have added the required devices to your NetDVMS system see How to Add a Device all cameras connected to the devices are connected to the system as well You are able to specify a wide variety of settings for each camera connected to the NetDVMS system Your entry point for such camera configuration is the Administrator window To configure a camera select the required camera in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then click the Administrator window s Settings button This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window in which you have access to settings for the camera in question including e How the camera should record frame rate image quality etc e Where and when to store recorded video from the camera e Motion detection sensitivity e Triggering of notifications and external output e and more This also appl
117. c event do the following 1 Inthe Administrator window click the Generic Events button This will open the Generic Events window 2 Inthe Generic Events window first select the Generic item then click the Add new event button 145 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Cekme Lepra This will open the Add New Event window for specifying generic events 3 Now specify information in the following fields Ada Hore Len E General Deen hiy Bafici eerie lyri Mpa l card feed fn ere rr Pe rta E gt Diario de Papa Evert ory ad SPTE f Dri il ee Eee nie er rect misting tee ae Pia BAG M ruri e Event name Specify a name for the event Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp e Event Protocol Select which protocol NetDVMS should listen for Any i e TCP as well as UDP TCP only or UDP only Which port is used NetDVMS listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window default is port 1234 e Event rule type Select how particular NetDVMS should be when analyzing received data packages Match if the received package must contain only the exact message specified in the Event message include field see description in the following Search if the received package must contain the message specified in the Event message include field but may also have other content
118. camera s database the oldest archive for all cameras archived on that drive will be moved to another drive moving archives is only possible if you use dynamic archiving with which you can archive to several different drives configured through the Archive Setup Window or tf moving is not possible deleted If no archives are present on the drive containing the camera s database the size of all camera databases on the drive will be reduced by deleting a percentage of their oldest recordings thus temporarily limiting the size of all databases When the recording server is restarted upon such database resizing the original database sizes will be used You should therefore make sure the drive size problem is solved or adjust camera database sizes to reflect the altered drive size Grip Should the database resizing procedure take place you will be informed on screen in NetGuard EVS in log files and if set up through an e mail and or SMS alert Grip For more information about how NetDVMS responds to the threat of running out of disk Space see About Archiving Image Quality The Image Quality button opens the Configure Device window in which you are able to configure image resolution compression etc for the camera Event Notifications The Event Notifications button opens the Setup Notifications on Events window In which you are able to select events for triggering event indications for the camera when displayed in N
119. cccccccccccncccncnonnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnos 207 Opening the NetMatrix Monitor WINdAOW cccccccccccccccccncncncncnoncnonononnnnonononononononononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnss 207 t1 And 22 NN AAA AA ROS PP aseaceenes E EIS ase 207 Camera IntormaloR ui tea eee eee 208 Mage Aspect RAOS isiin a ada 209 Toggling between Regular and Full Screen VieW cccceeceecceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeaaaaaaaaeeeeeeeseseaeaeaaeaannseeeeeees 209 Changing the Configuration of a Running NetMatrix MonitOFr cccccccccccccccnccnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononononnnnnnnnnnss 209 Accepting Received COMPTANAS isis ar A dao oda 209 Alens upon Executed Commands ei a cs ee eek 210 SSI cu SMS sehen o e to E CoN nuh ci ican ah ates tid O e aye hota 210 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Welcome NETMATRIX MONITOR WINDOW SHORTCUT MENU ccsescssscnsscnssenseecseeseeeseeeaeeonsenaeeeaeeeneeeaes 211 NOTIFICATION AREA SHORTCUT MENU Saca 211 Shutting Down the NetMatrix Monitor ApplicatiON cccccccccccccccncncnnncncnnnnnnononononononononononononononnnnnononononnnonos 212 LOGGING ozro a 213 Log File Types Locations and NaMe ccccccsssseccececeeeseeeeececsecseeeeceaeeesueceeseeeaasueeeeeaseaueeeeeeessaeseeseeessssagseeeesessnees 213 AMIA rato Application Log FM as 213 Recording Server Service LOG Fl Sacco cardo caseseaceaseieiesracaceseassaicee
120. ce 240 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to rar Mirtigans al ndo lia This will open the Add New Event window for adding event buttons 3 Inthe Add New Event window for adding event buttons the Button related to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device If you are adding a globally available event button the field will display Global Ada h Leer AA ee ana AA mar ramp Pd j ord amend E rapi et THT bee erd SS fm map cc Ca Larco Now specify information in the following fields e Manual event name Specify a name for the event button Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt Y e Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send e mail if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window If requiring an image recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box e Optional If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send SMS if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been se
121. ce Manager section The name may for example refer to the physical location of the camera s attached to the device 227 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to Device tatup Wizard E Pene aia rara Gat hkj rr a a ree e denice ms Bre o RA Shpa Paj aros hor het e dee Fister epale dai Did Fa Corvera deb buon Eo pel up cae cars aed PT 2 deren bo nm deca Cams Sa Eck Caracuel Assigning a name to the device Grip You may click the Camera Setup button to access the Camera Settings for window in which you are able to specify certain settings related to camera name and PTZ control The latter requires that the camera Is a PTZ Pan tilt Zoom camera 7 Click Finish 8 The device will be listed in the Administrator window s Device Manager section To view a list of cameras attached to the device click the plus sign next to the device name Grip Cameras are listed for each device with default names such as Camera 1 etc If you want to change the name of a camera right click the camera name in question then select Edit from the menu that appears Grip Individual cameras listed in the Device Manager section are by default enabled meaning that video from the cameras are by default transferred to NetDVMS provided that the cameras are marked as online in the Camera Alert Scheduler Window also default If required you can disable a camera listed in the Device Manager section by r
122. ce Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients Windos Comparente Wizard rice Compenestr Wi car tied Gt ares rre of inion IP To add a mea sora cick che chekib A ae bow ara tha rd pri ol s croan el be rata To ce ba nied in a comparen dk Diii Lamparantz a 3 Unageneni and Mortonng Tool a Meteo Chup ER AAA Dicen old ob ara FTP uo don ath ippo La hrni ce arth Acto Sora Pages andl dalabaio corroolora Tata del apar sena 53H Deisi Sale P hilabe Hk 152585 HE 4 Follow the wizard s instructions to complete the installation NET Framework Verification NET Framework version 1 1 4322 must be installed on the server in order to be able to run the NetPDA NetCell Server Note that later versions of NET Framework may also be present on the server If NET Framework 1 1 as well as one or more later versions are present on the server Windows default settings may cause a later NET Framework version to be used instead of NET Framework 1 1 4322 To verify change which NET Framework version is used do the following LL 2 3 4 Click Start and select Control Panel Click Administrative Tools Click Internet Information Services In the Internet Information Services window s left pane locate and right click the Default Web Site item T Internet Information Services 8 local computer Web Sites e EN H 4 Defauk SMTP Virtual Server Example only content on 5 6 your
123. ces you will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the device Lets you specify settings for a selected camera or audio source e Cameras When you have selected a camera in the Administrator window s Device Manager section clicking the Settings button will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window in which you specify camera settings e Audio sources When you have selected an audio source in the Administrator window s Device Manager section clicking the Settings button will open the Microphone Settings window tf the selected audio source is a microphone or Speaker Settings window if the selected source is a speaker in which you can enable disable the audio source and change its name if required Opens the O Setup window in which you are able to define events based on input events for example when a door sensor detects that a door is opened and VMD Video Motion Detection The I O Setup window also lets you specify output e g a siren When defined events can be used for a variety of purposes For example an input event can be used for triggering output for starting a particular camera and for triggering that an e mail or SMS message is sent to a particular user notifying the user of the recorded event See also the description of the I O Control button Opens the Event Buttons window in which you are able to define events for use on event buttons Event buttons can used in Ne
124. ch action should take place when the event occurs ES Alan Coral Di pla 1 Motion on Back Door West Wino Camera b Delete Motion om Back Do West Wir Camera b Connect You have three actions to choose from e Connect Connect to the camera you will specify the actual camera in the next step e Disconnect then connect Disconnect any existing connection to the camera you will specify the actual camera in the next step then connect again This option is useful because NetMatrix recipients are often able to show live video from more than one event in which case the live video will appear in the NetMatrix recipient on a first in first out basis Each time a new event occurs video from the latest event is displayed prominently in a specific position on the NetMatrix recipient while at the same time video from the older events is shifted to less prominent positions and eventually pushed out of the NetMatrix recipient in order to make space for the latest event s video With the Connect option you may thus experience that if video triggered by one event on a camera Is already shown on the NetMatrix recipient videos triggered by another event on the same camera would not be displayed prominently as coming from the latest event simply because the NetMatrix recipient is already showing video from the camera in a less prominent position By selecting Disconnect then connect you can avoid this issue and ensure that video fro
125. check box if the NetMatrix recipient in question is using Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS Clear Removes any content in the Name Address Port Password and NetGuard EVS fields Update Available only if you have edited the properties of an existing NetMatrix recipient Updates the properties of the selected NetMatrix recipient with the changes made during editing Add Available only if you have added properties of a new NetMatrix recipient in the Name Address Port Password and possibly NetGuard EVS fields Adds the new NetMatrix recipient to the list Event Tab There are two ways in which NetMatrix triggered video can appear in a NetMatrix recipient e Another user wants to share important video and sends it to the required NetMatrix recipient from a NetGuard EVS or from a custom made web page e Video is sent to the required NetMatrix recipient automatically when a predefined event occurs The Event tab is used for configuring the automatic sending of live video based on predefined events it lets you define exactly which events and cameras to use You define this on a per NetMatrix recipient basis To define what should happen on which NetMatrix recipient when an event occurs do the following 1 Select the required NetMatrix recipient 2 Right click the NetMatrix recipient to select the required event 160 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Cel Alem Cantal
126. creen rotated view De Reception Camera 1 ip 11 27 Grip As an alternative to tapping the Full Screen icon simply tap anywhere inside the regular view s live image area When in full screen view tap anywhere inside the live image area to return to regular view PTZ Control If the selected camera is a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera you are able to control the position of the camera with the NetPDA NetCell Client s PTZ controls TO move a PTZ camera tap one of the PTZ control s direction arrows to move the camera in the required direction Tapping the center button will move the PTZ camera to its home i e default position To zoom in and out tap the Zoom icons PES ip You are also able to control the position of the PTZ camera by using the navigation buttons on the PDA itself If you are viewing the live video in the rotated full screen view PTZ control with the PDA s navigation buttons is automatically rotated to match the view 195 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients PTZ Preset Positions If PTZ preset positions have been set up for the selected PTZ camera you are able to move the PTZ camera to the preset positions TO move a camera to a preset position select the required position in the Sel preset list Note The list is not available when video is viewed in full screen Output Control If manually controlled output such as lights sirens etc has been set up for
127. cted motion or input from a specific sensor when the criteria are met the system interprets it as an event and automatically triggers the required actions However you may also want users to be able to manually force an event to occur For this purpose NetDVMS lets you define event buttons Event buttons let users manually trigger events from NetGuard EVS In NetGuard EVS event buttons are actually not buttons instead users manually trigger events by selecting them from a list See also About Event Buttons for examples of the many ways in which you can use event buttons To add an event button do the following 1 Inthe Administrator window click the Event Buttons button This will open the Event Buttons window 2 Inthe Event Buttons window first select the camera or other device for which you want the event button to be available then click the Add new event button Note that you are also able to make the event button globally available i e available to users regardless of which camera device they have selected in NetGuard EVS To make the event button globally available simply select Global at the top of the list instead of a particular camera device Kee na Martinus ee perri l EEEE Aj pd A Ces i Pe CARE si mh T Dii ra rd This will open the Add New Event window for adding event buttons 3 Inthe Add New Event window for adding event buttons the Button related to field will show the
128. cts a grid section right mouse button clears a grid section Selected areas are highlighted in blue 51 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Define Exclusion Regions Window s Buttons and Check Boxes The Define Exclusion Regions window features the following buttons Button Description Check Box Set All Lets you quickly select all grid sections in the preview image This may be advantageous if you want to disable motion detection in most areas of the image in which case you can simply clear the few sections in which you do not want to disable motion detection Clear All Lets you quickly clear all grid sections in the preview image Auto By clicking the Auto button you can make NetDVMS automatically detect areas with noise insignificant changes in individual pixels which should not be regarded as motion in the image and automatically mark such areas as areas in which motion detection should be disabled As the automatic detection is based on an analysis of a number of images it may take a few seconds from you click the Auto button to noisy areas are detected and marked as areas in which motion detection should be disabled Note The automatic detection of noisy areas happens according to the noise sensitivity setting specified in the Adjust Motion Detection window In order for the automatic detection of noisy areas to work as intended it is recommended that you specify a noise
129. d EVS offers the ability to individual user rights permitting export evidence in the AVI movie clip JPEG still image as well as NetDVMS database formats e No Use NetGuard NetGuard offers the ability to individual user rights permitting export evidence in the AVI and JPEG formats Will you use a NET based client application What is NET The NET software development platform allows the interconnection of computers and services for the exchange and combination of data and objects The platform makes extensive use of so called web services which provide the ability to use the web rather than single applications for various services This in turn provides the ability for centralized data storage as well as automated updating and synchronization of information The video platform enhances software developers ability to create re usable and customizable modules which makes it possible to develop highly flexible software solutions You can therefore as a rule of thumb expect video based software to be highly flexible ready for integration of new features plugins etc 175 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients However organizations and their requirements are different and some organizations find that the high degree of interconnection of services and computers inherent in a video based solution is not desirable Instead such organizations rely on more classic Windows solutions e
130. d Ocularis Client Lite NetGuard EVS user for more information about views see the separate NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard EVS documentation If a user group does not have this right shared groups in the OnSSI client will be protected indicated by a padlock icon Note Views created in a NetGuard can only be shared with other NetGuard users Views created in a NetGuard EVS can only be shared with other NetGuard EVS users It is not possible to share views across the two types of client 100 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output e Edit Private Views Ability to create and edit views in private groups in the OnSSI client Views placed in private groups can only be accessed by NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite NetGuard EVS user who created them for more information about views see the separate NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard EVS documentation If a user group does not have this right private groups in the OnSSI client will be protected indicated by a padlock icon Denying remote users the right to create their own views may make sense in some cases for example in order to limit bandwidth use Tip By clearing the View Live Browse and Setup check boxes you can effectively disable the user s group s ability to use the OnSSI client for example while the user is on vacation This would typically be a temporary alternative to deleting the user group 3 Inthe User Righ
131. d an AND operator to the Event message include field With an AND operator you specify that the terms on both sides of the AND operator must be present Example User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday In the above example the term User001 as well as the term Door053 as well as the term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be met It is not enough for only one or two of the terms to be present As a rule of thumb the more terms you combine with AND the fewer results you will retrieve Useroo1 Door053 129 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Field Button Example Few results match the criterion User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday OR Lets you add an OR operator to the Event message include field With an OR operator you specify that either one or another term must be present Example User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday In the above example the term User001 or the term Door053 or the term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be met The criterion is satisfied even if only one of the terms is present As a rule of thumb the more terms you combine with OR the more results you will retrieve ODO aa sunday Example Many results match the criterion User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday Remove Lets you remove the item immediately to the left of a cursor positioned in the Event message include field If no cursor has been positioned in the Event me
132. d events When an existing event is selected in the list clicking the Add new event button will open the New Timer window in which you are able to specify timer events Timer events are separate events triggered by the event under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred Opens the Edit Event window for editing generic events in which you are able to edit the settings for an existing event selected in the Defined events list Lets you remove an existing event selected in the Defined events Note The selected event will be removed without further warning 125 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Add New Event The Add New Event window for specifying generic events lets you specify the settings for an event based on input from external sources using the TCP and UDP protocols You are able to specify the criteria according to which NetDVMS should analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and whether any notifications should be triggered when the event occurs Onrip TCP and UDP packages used for generic events may contain special characters such as O a etc within the text string to be analyzed dahi iira E rral 13 Cs al rel ee Halfa aa rs Porri lo Md Dal Ped fied Lara hoe poe Pani aie bee a A Fri rd Se Ee Pe TE i Dram nk reg Ea brg La se
133. dd New Basic USC I runas ld 97 How to Add a New Windows User or Group sacada aladdin 97 How to Edit an Existing User Name or Password ancoan a a a e E aa E a a 98 Howto Remove an Existing USE ata ios 98 What Information to Provide to USES 0 aii 98 Deine Yser RONS WINGOW a e a alae Niu 8 ca alates EO eel tl a dhelalatalt 100 INPUT EVENTS 6c OUT PU DV cuina 09 TYPES IOI EV en A O 103 Speciving Input Events and OuPU orr a a ao pus 103 Usmo Dedicated TO DEVICES ossa de i 104 V O SEUD E AO A AA EIA a 104 I O Setup Window s Defined Events List and BU ONS oooooccocicicicicicinococcccononononannnnnnnnn nara rn rana 105 INPUTEVO sic oRrciaN 108 Add New Event Window S FielAS vice becsescasea dep ose said 108 EME e de o Os 109 Edit Event wVIMGOW Ss SS pisito id 110 Multiple IADUTEV Clits VVINGOW mercancia e a e R iia 111 Multiple Input Events Window s Fields and BU LONS cccccccccnnncnonononononononononnnnnnnnnnnnonononononnnononenonenennenenenenininos 112 Add INEW Event WIN O We nece reno E N 113 Add New Event Windows Fieldsi sanansa sa a EE EAEE a Aa A a I Ea Saa 113 Add New DU aa ae a a eee 114 Add New Output Window s Elorrio 114 Festing the Deine OPI E nica ias dd air 115 ECU QUPULIMO adela 115 Edit OUIPUE VWINGOW S HO sra aa 116 Testing the DStined Ouro aaa a diia iio 116 Advanced Window S Alsa e de e be ds e Led do O o O 117 New TIMES VIG OW stato sio lt sabi dado 118 NeW TIME Window S Pell uscar dt ie lant cess spate ance c
134. dow Fisheye is a technology that allows viewing of 360 degree panoramic images through an advanced lens The Fisheye Camera Configuration window lets you configure the fisheye functionality of a camera Thos Ca ot a De Pit crs T F Ey Eyi Canter En Yiee Hi P fa See Ha Dai Fla Tmp Fed Ta Hes A Hoe A ar aa E id matorral bo oe Access You access the Fisheye Camera Configuration window from the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera name window by selecting the Enable Fisheye check box and clicking the Fisheye Settings button 47 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Fisheye View Adjustment The camera s fisheye functionality is configured by adjusting its fisheye view field indicated by a green ellipse in the preview image so it encloses the actual image area of the fisheye lens You do this by specifying a number of values which will be used by the fisheye technology for converting the elliptic image into an ordinary rectangular image You are able to set the ellipse s X radius Y radius X center and Y center either by specifying the required values directly in the four fields or by using the following buttons to adjust the ellipse R Decreases the radius of the fisheye view field The ellipse s horizontal X and vertical Y radiuses are changed at the same time keeping the aspect ratio R Increases the radius of the fisheye view fi
135. dow When selecting an already specified event in the Defined Events list you are able to click the Add new event button to access the New Timer window New Timer Window s Fields The New Timer window contains the following fields Timer event Read only field displaying the name of the event or event button is started by under which the timer event is defined Timer event Lets you specify a name for the timer event name Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt S XN 118 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Note Some camera devices only support event names of a certain length and or with a certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details Timer event Lets you specify the amount of time that should pass between the occurs after event occurring event button being clicked and the timer event Specify the required amount of time in either seconds or minutes Examples e The timer event should occur 15 seconds after the event under which it is defined has occurred e The timer event should occur 2 minutes after the event button under which it has been defined has been clicked Event Buttons Manual Triggering Event buttons lets users manually trigger events from NetGuard EVS In NetGuard EVS event buttons are actually not buttons instead users manually trigger events by selecting them from a list You are
136. e e Multi camera devices Clicking the Add VMD Event Motion Detection button will open a simple dialog in which you select the required camera This way you are able to define a VMD event for each camera on a multi camera device Lets you edit the settings for an item selected in the Defined events list For devices capable of handling a single input event only the button will open the Edit Event window for editing input events For devices capable of handling several input events the button will open the Multiple Input Events window If the selected item is a timer event the button will open the New Timer window If the selected item is an output the button will open the Edit Output window Lets you remove an event selected in the Defined events list Note The selected event will be removed without further warning Opens the Acvanced window in which you are able to specify network settings to be used in connection with event handling which ports to use for FTP alerts and SMTP input output events as well as which polling frequency to use on devices requiring polling 107 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Input Events The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only lets you specify the settings for an input event on devices capable of handling one input event only ar aera neraz porras bal i Pare Depa ha ree Pr
137. e database is put aside a special temporary database is created for storage of new recordings This way no new recordings will be lost even though the original database is full provided enough disk space Is available for storing the special temporary database NetDVMS will wait for the next archiving occasion either scheduled or because the special temporary database also becomes full It will then archive the content of the special temporary database and thus free up space in it NetDVMS will then continue to store new recordings in the special temporary database This will apply until the Recording Server service is restarted Once the service has been restarted the content of the original database will be archived and new recordings will again be stored in the original database The special temporary database will also be archived and will then cease to exist can view recordings from the special temporary database Normally the content of databases can be viewed through a NetGuard EVS or Viewer regardless whether the databases have been archived or not However the content of the special temporary database cannot be viewed through a NetGuard EVS until the content has been archived On the surveillance server itself you will be able to view the content of the special temporary database through the Viewer even if the special temporary database has not been archived yet Since the special temporary database will be used for storing new
138. e same time video from the older events is shifted to less prominent positions and eventually pushed out of the NetMatrix recipient in order to make space for the latest event s video With the Connect option you may thus experience that if video triggered by one event on a camera is already shown on the NetMatrix recipient videos triggered by another event on the same camera would not be displayed prominently as coming from the latest event simply because the NetMatrix recipient is already showing video from the camera in a less prominent position By selecting Disconnect then connect you can avoid this issue and ensure that video from the latest event is always displayed prominently e Disconnect Disconnect the camera you will specify the actual camera in the next step Use if a particular event should cause video from a particular camera to stop being displayed in the NetMatrix recipient even if they are not yet old enough to be pushed out of the NetMatrix recipient When you have selected an action another red exclamation mark will indicate that there is still some configuration to be done 161 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output ES Alara Cordial Digi Vipin on Back Dior rea wiry Camera i Connect 4 Right click the action to select which camera to apply the action on EA Ale Cyna Display Moton on Back Door Waal Wing Camera b T Coma Delete Connec
139. e Add New Event window for specifying generic events contains the following fields and buttons in the Event rule string section Field Button Description Event substring Event message include Add Lets you specify the individual items for which NetDVMS should look out when analyzing data packages Specify one or more terms then click the Add button to add the specified term s to the Event message include field the content of which will be used for the actual analysis Examples e Single term User001 when added to the Event message include field the term will appear as User001 e Several terms as one item User001 Door053 Sunday when added to the Event message include field the terms will appear as User001 Door053 Sunday When you add several terms as one item appearing as e g User001 Door053 Sunday in the Event message include field everything between the quotation marks must appear together in the package in the specified sequence in order to match your criterion If the terms must appear in the package but not necessarily in any exact sequence add the terms one by one i e so they will appear as User001 Door053 Sunday in the Event message include field Displays the string which will be used for the actual package analysis The field is not directly editable However you are able to position the cursor inside the field in order to determine where a new item should be
140. e Event priority Specify a priority between O lowest priority and 1000 highest priority for the event in case a received data package matches more than one event e Event rule string Specify what NetDVMS should look out for when analyzing the data packages then click the Add button to add the specified term s to the Event message include field the content of which is used when analyzing received data packages You are furthermore able to use processing order parentheses and two different Boolean operators in the Event message include field by clicking the buttons 146 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output to the right of the field e Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send Email if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window If requiring an image recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box e Optional If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send SMS if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window
141. e IIS e Make sure that IIS is running Test Interface Is Displayed but It Is Not Possible to Log In Solutions e Start the NetPDA NetCell Server Administrator from the desktop shortcut and verify that the IP address or hostname in the Host IP field points to your Image Server Also make sure that the port number in the Port field matches the port number on which the Image Server service is running e Make sure that the Image Server service is running on the surveillance system e Make sure that the user account used when accessing the test interface has been correctly set up on the Image Server and that the user account provides access to the required cameras The NetPDA NetCell Client is installed on the PDA itself by using a PC with the Microsoft ActiveSync synchronization program First you install the NetPDA NetCell Client on the PC then you use ActiveSync to transfer the NetPDA NetCell Client from the PC to the PDA Chip If ActiveSync is not installed on the PC you can download the latest version from http www microsoft com downloads 190 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients Installing the NetPDA NetCell Client Note Before using the following procedure connect the PDA to the PC install the ActiveSync program on the PC and set up synchronization with the PDA To install the NetPDA NetCell Client do the following e On the PC insert the NetDVMS software DVD wait for a
142. e Minimum Logging Interval Minimum number of seconds between logged events Specifying a high number of seconds between logged events may help reduce the size of the audit log Default is 60 seconds e In Sequence Timespan Maximum number of seconds to pass for viewed images to be considered to be within the same sequence Specifying a high number of seconds may thus help limit the number of viewed sequences logged and reduce the size of the audit log Default is ten seconds Grip Read more about NetDVMS logging in About Logging Language Support and XML Encoding Section In the Language Support and XML Encoding section select the language character set used by the NetDVMS server and access clients Example If the NetDVMS server runs a Japanese version of Windows select Japanese Provided access clients also use a Japanese version of Windows this will ensure that the right language and character encoding is used in clients communication with the server If using a master slave setup remember to specify the same language character set on all involved servers Good to know Client Access to Live Video from Stopped Cameras Access client users are able to view live video from cameras even though the cameras in question are not online online means that the camera delivers a video stream to the surveillance system server as defined in the Camera Alert Scheduler Window This however requires that a particular setting in the Administ
143. e Pole The Add New Event window for specifying generic events Access You access the Add New Event window for specifying generic events from the Generic Events window by clicking the Add new event button The Add New Event window for specifying generic events is divided into three sections General Event Settings Section The Add New Event window for specifying generic events contains the following fields in the General Event settings section Event Name Lets you specify a name for the event Each event must have a unique name Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Event Lets you select which protocol NetDVMS should listen for in order to Protocol detect the event e Any Listen for and analyze packages using TCP as well as UDP protocol e TCP Listen for and analyze packages using TCP protocol only 126 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Field __ _ Description Event rule type Event priority e UDP Listen for and analyze packages using UDP protocol only which port is used NetDVMS listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Acvanced window default is port 1234 Lets you select how particular NetDVMS should be when analyzing received data packages e Match In order for the event to occur the received package must contain exactly the message specified in t
144. e available hardware storage capacity Lets you import all required Device License Keys DLKs in one go thus avoiding the need to specify each DLK manually when adding devices See also How to Import Device License Keys Lets you access NetMatrix configuration NetMatrix is an integrated product for forcing video from any camera to any monitor on a network operating with NetDVMS Note The NetTransact button is not functional If NetTransact add on product for handling loss prevention through video evidence combined with time linked POS or ATM NetTransaction data is installed on the server use Windows Start menu or the NetTransact Administrator desktop shortcut to access the NetTransact Administrator Use with NetTransact versions earlier than 2 1 is not supported Starts the Device Setup Wizard which guides you through the process of adding a new device 26 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Button __ _ Description Edit Device Remove Device Settings I O Setup Event Buttons See also How to Add a Device When you have selected a device in the Administrator window s Device Manager section clicking the Edit Device button lets you edit settings for the selected device in the Edit device settings window Lets you remove a device selected in the Administrator window s Device Manager section In order to prevent accidental removal of devi
145. e because there is only a single NetDVMS server on your system simply do not specify anything in the Master Slave Setup section Upgrading Servers in an Existing Master Slave Setup The servers involved in a master slave setup should preferably all use the latest NetDVMS version If you only upgrade to NetDVMS 6 0 or later on the master server while letting the slave servers run a previous version e g NetDVMS 5 6 access client users will lose access to key functionality in their client applications It is therefore highly recommended that you upgrade all the servers involved in an existing master slave setup to NetDVMS 6 0 or later When you do this a certain procedure is recommended The procedure ensures that remote users will not experience any loss of functionality not even during a transition period in which some servers may run NetDVMS 6 0 or later while other servers still run a previous NetDVMS version 1 Install NetDVMS 6 0 or later on the master server 2 Inthe Image Server Administrator window on the master server select the Pre 6 0 Version Slaves check box Deya af Masher Server r Pre 6 0 Verson Slawes Pr Shes 3 Click OK to close the master server s Image Server Administrator window thus restarting the Image Server service 4 Upgrade the slave servers to NetDVMS 6 0 or later 5 When all of the slave servers have been upgraded clear the Pre 6 0 Version Slaves check box on the master server and click
146. e go 2 Click the gt gt button to copy the selected preset positions to the Patrolling list 3 The camera will move between preset positions in the sequence they appear in the Patrolling list starting at the preset position listed first If you want to change the sequence of preset positions in the Preset Positions list select a preset position name and use the move up or move down buttons to move the selected preset position name To remove a preset position from the Patrolling list select the preset position in question and click the lt lt button Specifying Timing Settings for a PTZ Patrol Scheme Having selected a patrolling scheme in the Patrol scheme list you are able to specify timing settings for the patrol scheme 1 In the Stay at each position in the patrol schedule field specify the number of seconds for which the PTZ camera should stay at each preset position 2 In the Time for each PTZ camera movement to complete field specify the number of seconds required for the PTZ camera to move between preset positions 62 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output In order not to generate false motion alarms motion detection for the PTZ camera is automatically disabled while the camera moves between two preset positions After the specified number of seconds motion detection is automatically enabled again It is thus important that the camera is able to reach all of t
147. e installation wizard starts click Next to continue 3 Read and accept the End User License Agreement then click Next 4 Ifan earlier NetDVMS version 6 0a or later is present on the server you will be asked to accept that it is automatically removed during installation of the new version The automatic removal will not delete any existing recordings or configuration If asked we recommend answering Yes since this will ensure that old versions will not interfere with your new version Note that NetDVMS versions earlier than 6 0 must be removed manually before installing the new version see Upgrading from a Previous Version Select Typical installation advanced users can select Custom installation and choose which features to install and where to install them 5 Select the Install licensed Version option and specify your user name organization and Software License Code SLC printed on your Product License Sheet When ready click Next 6 Click the Install button to begin the software installation During the process all the necessary components will be installed one after the other 8 Click Finish on the last step to complete the installation e NetDVMS s Administrator window may appear on your screen during installation When this is the case the window will automatically close again after a short while 18 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Installation e If a Status Information window ap
148. e periods are indicated in gray Changes between patrolling schemes are indicated by a thin vertical line Note that the Patrolling bar is only available if you have selected a PTZ camera for which patrolling has been set up Tip When several patrol schemes are in use you are able to see which patrol scheme is used for a particular period Click the relevant section of the gray bar the name of the patrol scheme in question will appear in the Patrol scheme list located below the calendar section Osem E maad sus Tn EE Patrols Po Colored bars indicating active periods 171 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Camera Alerts Scheduler Window s Copy and Paste Buttons Button Description Copy Schedule Paste Schedule Copy and Paste to All Lets you copy the schedule displayed in the calendar section When used in combination with the Paste Schedule button you are able to quickly re use schedules from one camera to another Lets you paste a copied schedule for use with the selected camera The same copied schedule can be pasted to several cameras simply by selecting and pasting to one camera after the other Grip If you want to use a schedule for all cameras specify a schedule for one camera then use the Copy and Paste to All button to copy the schedule and paste it to all cameras in one go Lets you copy the schedule displayed in the calendar secti
149. e service is used Recording Server service log files are by default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software Note however that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the General Settings window s Logfile Settings section Recording Server service log files are named according to the structure RecordingServerYYYYMMDD log e g RecordingServer20070615 log Event Log Files These files log information about registered events read more about events in About Input Events amp Output A log file is created for each day on which events have occurred Event log files are by default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software Note however that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the General Settings window s Event Recording Settings section Event log files should be viewed using NetGuard EVS or the Viewer e NetGuard EVS In the Browse tab s Alerts section select the required event then click the Get List button to see when the event in question was detected e Viewer Select the Viewer s Alarm Overview control panel then click the Events button to view the events log 213 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Device Drivers Image Server Service Log Files These files log activity on the Image Server service A log file is created for each day the Image Server is used Image Server log files are by default p
150. e slider you may specify a value between O and 10 000 in the field next to the slider to control the motion sensitivity setting Define Exclusion Regions Window The Define Exclusion Regions window lets you disable motion detection in specific areas of a camera s images Disabling motion detection in certain areas may help you avoid detection of irrelevant motion for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background Please ube the lett ngit mouse button to select Genelect aieas in the mage that thould be excluded kom motion delecion Mosen will net be detected in the seas marked wath Dhue amp 40 A OA oper pe tech es tb oS TE mr gt par The Define Exclusion Regions window with an exclusion area highlighted in blue JAccess You access the Define Exclusion Regions window by clicking the Exclude Regions button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Defining Areas in which Motion Detection Should Be Disabled The Define Exclusion Regions window features a preview image from the camera You define the areas in which motion detection should be disabled in the preview image which is divided into small sections by a grid To define areas in which motion detection should be disabled drag the mouse pointer over the required areas in the preview image while pressing the mouse button down Left mouse button sele
151. e value one tenth of a second between state checks For information about which I O devices require polling see the release note I O Setup The I O Setup window lets you define input events VMD Video Motion Detection events and output for devices on your surveillance system When events occur they can trigger one or more actions e Input events occur when input from an external input unit is received on a device s input port for example when an external sensor detects that a door is opened Some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion for detecting moving and or static objects etc configured in the devices own software typically by accessing a browser based configuration Interface on the device s IP address in which case such detections from the device can also be used as input events e VMD events occur when NetDVMS detects motion on a particular camera e Outputs are used for activating external output units for example for switching on lights or sounding a siren The I O Setup window is used for defining which input events VMD events and outputs should be available on your system Input and VMD events can be used for triggering outputs or for triggering various actions on the surveillance system itself such as for starting or stopping cameras configured in the Camera Alert Scheduler window or for moving a PTZ camera to a particular preset position configured in the Event window for PTZ prese
152. ect required start and stop events in the Start event and Stop event lists Good to Know when You Set Patrolling Periods Select the required patrol scheme from the Patrol scheme list located below the calendar section then drag to select the required period in the calendar The Patrol scheme list is only available if you have selected a PTZ camera for which at least one patrol scheme has been set up When you set a Patrolling period you may be able to select between several patrol schemes This will depend upon how many patrol schemes have been set up in the Setup PTZ Patrolling window If you set patrolling periods with different patrol schemes immediately following each other in time changes between patrolling schemes will be indicated by a thin vertical line see also Colored Bars in the following Colored Bars The calendar uses colored bars to indicate active periods for each option Online E mail SMS etc e Inthe Online bar active periods are indicated in either pink or yellow e Pink indicates that the selected camera is continuously transferring video to the NetDVMS software e Yellow indicates that the selected camera transfers video to the NetDVMS software when a Specified event occurs e Inthe Speedup bar active periods are indicated by olive green e e Inthe E mail bar active periods are indicated in blue e Inthe SMS bar active periods are indicated in green e e Inthe Patrolling bar activ
153. ed NetMatrix recipients Delete Name Address Port Select check box to enable NetMatrix functionality Lists any already defined NetMatrix recipients e computers on which NetMatrix triggered video can be displayed To change the properties of an already defined NetMatrix recipient select the required NetMatrix recipient make the changes in the fields below the list then click the Update button To remove a NetMatrix recipient from the list select the unwanted NetMatrix recipient then click the Delete button You will be prompted to confirm the removal Available only when you have selected a NetMatrix recipient in the list Clicking the Delete button will remove the selected NetMatrix recipient You will be prompted to confirm the removal Used when adding a new NetMatrix recipient or editing the properties of an existing one Type a name for the NetMatrix recipient The name will appear in various day to day usage situations it is therefore a good idea to use a descriptive and unambiguous name Note NetMatrix recipient names must not contain the following characters lt gt Y Used when adding a new NetMatrix recipient or editing the properties of an existing one Specify the IP address of the NetMatrix recipient Grip To jump to the next IP address segment in the field press SPACE on your keyboard Used when adding a new NetMatrix recipient or editing the properties of an exist
154. ed an event button you are able to associate timer events with the event button Timer events are separate events occurring a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event button has been clicked Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only e A camera starts when an event button is selected in NetGuard EVS a timer event stops the camera after 15 seconds e A camera starts and the lights are switched on when an event button Is selected in NetGuard EVS a timer event stops the camera after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes To define a timer event for an event button select the required event button in he Defined Events list then click the Add new event button When you click the Add new event button while an already specified event button is selected in the Defined Events list the New Timer window opens allowing you to specify the required timer event Grip You may specify several timer events under a single event button However you cannot use a timer event under another timer event Editing Event Buttons and Timer Events To edit an event button or a timer event specified under an event button select the required event button or timer event in the Defined Events list then click the Edit selected button If you have selected an event button clicking the Edit selected button will open the Edit Event window for edit
155. ed for data from a camera to be archived plus 1 GB of free disk space per camera is available If not the archive drive s oldest data from the camera in question will be deleted until there is sufficient free space for the new data to be archived IMPORTANT You will lose the archive data being deleted Same Drive Automatic Moving or Deletion of Archives If Running Out of Disk Space In case the NetDVMS server is running out of disk space and the archiving drive is tdentical to the camera database drive NetDVMS will automatically do the following in an attempt to free up disk Space 1 First NetDVMS will attempt to move archives moving archives is only possible if you use dynamic archiving with which you can archive to several different drives configured through the Archive Setup Window This will happen if o there is less than 15 disk space left and the available disk space goes below 40 GB plus 2 GB per camera OF 67 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output o the available disk space goes below 225 MB plus 30 MB per camera example with ten cameras the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space went below 525 MB 225 MB plus 30 MB for each of the ten cameras The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running out of disk space just because they have less than 15 disk space left 2 If m
156. ed in the Time to add field to the Daily archiving times list Removes a selected archiving time from the Daily archiving times list 71 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Field Button Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply Set all Clear all If the Archive Setup window s Enable Archiving check box is selected this section lists cameras for which archiving is possible The section lists all enabled cameras i e cameras which depending on their individual settings may transfer video to the surveillance system The section also lists the path to the archiving directory for each camera Grip If a particular camera is not listed it is highly likely that the camera is disabled To check if a camera is disabled look for the camera in the Acministrator window s Device Manager section A disabled camera will be clearly indicated by an icon 48 and can be enabled if you right click the camera name SPECI FYING THAT ARCHIVING SHOULD APPLY FOR SPECIFIC CAMERAS To specify that archiving should apply for a specific camera select the check box next to the name of the required camera Reception Camera 1 Specifying that archiving should apply for a specific camera Remember that only when you click OK is archiving actually enabled for the selected cameras ARCHIVING LOCATIONS FOR I NDIVIDUAL CAMERAS STATIC ARCHI VI NG If the Automatic pat
157. eee R 213 Event LOG Ara iaa 213 Image Server Services Log Files cade 214 Image Server Service Audit OG Files sisina a a 214 Mn nn ab cee eect 214 Image mporn Semice OG Alea oo 214 EXDOM OG FISS ras R E 214 Log Fle SUTU CIU S E S T a E e hes 215 Integrity Checks and Possible Error Messages oooocccccccoconoconcccnonnncononononnnconnnnnnononrrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnonnnrnrnnnnennnnanennnss 215 VIDEO DEVICE DRIVER Sussie 216 Removing Old Version of Video Device DriVerS ooooccccccccoooccnnnonccnnanonnnonononnnnnnnnnonnnrrnnnnnnonnnrnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnrnonaanennnnnss 216 Installing New Version of Video Device Drivers cooooncccccccoocnccnnnonnonnncnnnnnnonnncnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnonnnrrnnnrnnrnnnrrnnnnennnnaninnnss 216 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME uo 218 SPRING SWITCH FROM STANDARD TIME TO DST ccccccssseeeeeeeeeeceeenseeeeeeeeceoesseeeeeeseeooensnneees 218 FALL SWITCH FROM DST TO STANDARD TIME ccccceeeseeeeeeeesseeeseoennseeeseoesseeeeeeonseeeseoeensesenees 218 VIRUS SCANNING O 219 3 BS WITGHIN Gacetilla 220 Whenl 3 GB SMILIE VA ai 220 What to Do If Running Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003 occcccccccnnccncccccconocononccononccnnnncnnancnons 221 What to Do If Running Windows 2008 Server or Windows VisSta cococccccccnnoccononocccnnoncnccnnnononnnnnccnnnnnncnnnnnnonones 221 REMOVAL ae o E o etare csc A cece EAEEREN EEEE 223 ENTIRE SYS NEM nai A A a eevee eived 223 REMOVE INDIVIDUAL COMPONEN TS das 223
158. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeeenenenegs 78 Download Manager s Tree Structure Explained ccccccccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseseneneneeeeenenenegs 79 Making New Features Available ccccccccccccececcsceuseseeeececeeeeeeeseaueuseeeeeeeeeeeeseseaaaesaueeseceeeeesessessaaaaaaseeeseeeeeeeeenaes 79 Installing New Features On Sener si on nll di e di ue dd cad 79 Making New Features Available through the Download Manager ccccceeeseeeceeeseeeeeeeceeeaueeseeeeeeanaseeeeeeeanaeses 80 Aiding and Removing Fecal ES iria dada dsleiads 80 Vir s scanning iO Ma A A er ce ces ae cas 80 GENERAL SETTINGS id 80 Administrar o CUINGS boo 81 Manual Start Recording SCHINGS iso a N 81 A sens soie ove estan ace 8 es aeseai A a a esceesseatteneceu se 81 RAMO MMS e D 81 LOOT GS SS TG Sarna 82 eso MA a non A A 82 A eer eenener rrr 83 Emale S sensata setae tae tena eens 84 SMS CUMING S A A been ions id 84 Ohange Password VVINGOW aici Metric a iain O A sess 84 How to Change the Administrator PASSWOPK cccccccsseeseeeceeeaneceeeeeseaseeueeeeeeeaasaeeeeeeesseaueeeesesaaaseeeesessaaseeeesessaanses 84 Nei ental Stuns WING OW 25 ssc sia ate gered nee A bd 85 Walk Sel VWVINGOWis ana ae area cre meat eee sio 85 SPECI VING RECI Sirrart rios 86 Speciiying Sender Sell ito 86 Specifying Default Subject and Message TextS ccccccccccccccncnononononcnnononononononononon
159. eeeseseseaueaseeeeeeeeeeesessaaeauansasseseeeeess 55 Howto Define 4 Preset POSI A id eel ee ea ees 56 PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name Window s Sections c cecceceeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 57 PAZ VIC W SOCON sess ese lee ae Ps sen ae aes ee I a sae ae ea ae 57 PIES CR FOSIIONS SCUO air iii iento 58 Preset Position OM EVENIS SeCUON EE A 59 Prat OMG Cc A a N 59 Event Window for PTZ Preset Positions ON EVEN 1 cccccccccssseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenseceeeeesaaeeeeeeeeessaeseeeeeeaeeasanseeeeessaees 60 Associating Preset Positions with Particular Events ccccccccccseeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeesaeasseeeeeesaaaseeeeeeeeaes 60 PITZ Parolling VV INCL OW 5 a a ae ae oe S etd A 61 Patrol Scheme tai iaa idi 61 Selecting Preset Positions to Be Used for a PTZ Patrol Scheme oocooooooccccccccnnnccnnnnnnnnnacnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnononannnnns 62 Specifying Timing Settings for a PTZ Patrol SCHEME saisaitia nandana aaea aa aa e aa aE a n 62 PTZ Patrolling Actions on Detected MOTION oooccccccccocnnccnccnnonanconnnnnnonnnconncnnnonnccnnnnnonnnrcnnnnnnrrnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnrrnnenonnns 63 PEZ SCANN cidad 63 gual RESOIITION EO E AA NA A N A AAAA 63 camera SEUINGS SECO sere cegcacnsesic cessor iine ai a Ea a a a ETE 64 Pro WMA Iii ds 64 ARCHIVING tico osos 65 AE aes ape sagayauseaiuad a naunyaaseas E E doa 65 HOWArCMVNGO ORSAI ects duces Games A A EA 65 Storing Archives at Other Loc
160. efault archiving location is specified for each camera The default archiving directory called Archives will be located at this location To specify another location for the archiving directory for a camera either click the browse icon next to the path listing for the required camera and browse to the required location or click the default path listing to overwrite it 73 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Grip TO maximize load sharing and optimize performance distribute archives across your available storage space if possible Note If specifying another archiving location than the default location the location you specify must exist You are not able to create new directories as part of the process If archiving to a network drive the regular camera database must still be stored on a local drive i e a drive attached directly to the computer running the NetDVMS system Archives for the selected camera will be stored in separate subdirectories under the Archives directory at the location you specify The subdirectories will be named according to the following structure Archives CameraMACAddress_VideoEncoderChannel DateAndTime Example With the default archiving folder located under C videodata recordings from an archiving taking place at 23 15 on 1st June 2008 for a camera attached to channel 2 on a video encoder device with the MAC address 00408c51e181 would be stored at
161. eld The ellipse s horizontal X and vertical Y radiuses are changed at the same time keeping the aspect ratio Rx Decreases the horizontal X radius of the ellipse Rx Increases the horizontal X radius of the ellipse Ry Decreases the vertical Y radius of the ellipse Ry Increases the vertical Y radius of the ellipse X Moves the ellipse to the left X Moves the ellipse to the right Y Moves the ellipse up Y Moves the ellipse down Previewing the Fisheye View You are able to toggle between previewing the fisheye view and the fisheye rendered view i e the original elliptic view as well as the flattened rectangular view resulting from applying the fisheye algorithm according to your specified values To toggle between the two different types of preview click the Toggle Preview button 48 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output When previewing the fisheye rendered view the following navigation buttons become available for moving around within the preview image area la la le le le EERE RE Moves the fisheye rendered view up and to the left Moves the fisheye rendered view up Moves the fisheye rendered view up and to the right Moves the fisheye rendered view to the left Moves the fisheye rendered view to its home position Moves the fisheye rendered view to the right Moves the fisheye rendered view down and to the left Moves the fisheye re
162. elect the required device in the Administrator window s Device Manager section and click the Edit Device button The Edit device settings window is divided into two sections Identify Video Device Section The Identify Video Device section contains the following fields buttons etc Field Description Button Device Type Select required device type from list Grip NetDVMS is able to automatically detect device type as well as serial number provided the IP address hostname and password of the device have been specified in the P address DNS Host Name and Root Password fields Simply click the Detect Device button to auto detect device type and serial number Detect Click button to auto detect device type and serial number Device Note Use of the auto detect feature requires that the IP address and password of the device have been specified in the IP address and Root Password fields Device Name used to identify the device Name Tip To enable easy identification of devices it is often a good 32 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Button Camera Settings Device Serial Number Device License Key Enable Fisheye Fisheye License Key Input Events Output idea to use a device name that refers to the physical area covered by the cameras attached to the device examples Reception Area Car Park B Entrance Door Note Device names must be unique you
163. emember that if on a local network the local IP address of the slave server must be used Before you start using your master slave setup remember to verify that e Required users have be defined on the master server as well as on each of the slave servers e Outside Access has been enabled on all involved servers and ports mapped accordingly in the routers or firewalls used if the slave servers are to be accessed from the internet Removing a Slave Server To remove a slave server from the Slave Administration window s list of slave servers select the slave server in the list and click the Delete Slave button Users amp User Rights The Image Server Administrator s User administration window lets you define access client users On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Access You access the User administration window by clicking the User Setup button in the Image Server Administrator window You are able to add new users in two ways which may be combined e Basic user Lets you create a dedicated surveillance system user account with basic user name and password authentication for each individual user If the NetPDA NetCell Server is installed this method works for NetPDA NetCell Client users e Windows user Lets you import individual users or groups defined locally on the server or users groups from Active Directory and authenticate them based on their Windows login
164. en given access will be visible to the user regardless of whether the cameras are connected to the master server or to one of the slave servers Note If they are to be accessed from the internet Enable Outside Access must be selected on all involved servers and ports must be mapped accordingly in the routers and or firewalls used Note If upgrading the NetDVMS servers involved in a master slave setup to NetDVMS 6 0 or later from a previous NetDVMS version a certain procedure is recommended Read Upgrading Servers in an Existing Master Slave Setup in the following for more information Configuration on the Master Server If the server you are configuring should be a master server do the following 1 Select the Designate as Master Server check box 2 Next define which other NetDVMS servers should act as slave servers To define other servers as slave servers click the Slaves button Pre 6 0 Version Slaves This will open the Slave Administration window in which you are able to define all required Slave servers Configuration on a Slave Server Apart from the notes listed above no special master slave configuration is required on a Slave server simply do not specify anything in the Master Slave Setup section 91 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Deals of Masher Server E Not Using a Master Slave Setup If you do not wish to use a master slave setup for exampl
165. en the Administrator window In the Administrator window click the Add Device button This will start the Device Setup Wizard On the first step of the wizard identify the required device either by e Typing the IP address of the device Grip To jump to the next IP address segment in the field press SPACE on your keyboard OF e Typing the DNS host name of the device This requires that you select the Use DNS host names box Device Setup Wizard Ed Fane pach infienation about he ees dete Ve ddr Petey o DP ae ene chek Pe if ES i Usa DHS hiat niana Dki a Fal Se buon i otter hn HITE port Bl eed FTF pot F e ud Pr alo Hest Canos Specifying the IP address of a device Note By default HTTP port 80 and FTP port 21 will be used for the device If the device you are adding uses other port numbers click the Port Setup button and specify required port numbers The need for specifying different ports may often apply if the device is located behind a NAT enabled router or a firewall When this is the case also remember to configure the router firewall so it maps the ports and IP address used by the device When ready click Next to go to the second step of the wizard If a password is used for the device type the password for the device s administrator account called the admin or root account on some devices Leave the Autodetect Device option selected then click Next When the device has been detected ty
166. ered when NetDVMS detects motion on a specific camera based on the motion detection settings defined in the Adjust Motion Detection window Note In addition to NetDVMS s motion detection some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion configured in the devices own software typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address Events based on 106 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Button Description Edit selected Remove selected Advanced motion detected on a device itself are not VMD Events they are input events since they are based on input from the device VMD events can be used just like regular input events For example a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera could move to a specific preset position when a VMD event occurs Only one VMD event can be defined per camera In order to avoid the risk of an excessively high number of VMD events being generated a VMD event cannot occur more frequently than every five seconds The Add VMD Event Motion Detection button works slightly different depending on whether the selected device is a single camera device or a multi camera device such as a video encoder e Single camera devices Clicking the Add VMD Event Motion Detection button will instantly add a VMD event to the selected device provided a VMD event has not already been defined for the devic
167. eriods for each camera You are also able to specify if cameras should go online when specific events occur e g when a door is opened and if e mail or sound alerts should be used if motion is detected during specific periods of time e g during working hours If using PTZ cameras with patrolling you are furthermore able to specify if certain patrol schemes should be used during specific periods of time 25 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Button __ _ Description General Settings Archive Setup Import DLKs NetMatrix NetTransact Add Device Grip By default all cameras are online at all times You will only need to modify scheduler settings if you require cameras to be online only at specific times or events or if you want to use specific alerts or PTZ patrol schemes Opens the General Settings window in which you are able to specify a number of settings related to e Administrator password e User rights for the Administrator application e NetCentral settings e PTZ patrolling pause time out if using PTZ cameras with patrolling e E mail settings for alerts sent via e mail e SMS settings for alerts sent via SMS e Log file settings e Other advanced settings Opens the Archive setup window in which you specify NetDVMS s archiving settings Archiving lets you keep recordings for as long as required limited only be th
168. ernatively refer to the Viewer User s Manual available on the NetDVMS software DVD 200 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual NetMatrix Monitor NetMatrix Monitor NetMatrix is an integrated product allowing distributed viewing of video from any camera on any monitor on a network operating with NetDVMS A computer on which NetMatrix triggered video can be shown is known as a NetMatrix recipient Being able to view NetMatrix triggered video requires that either the NetMatrix Monitor application or a NetGuard EVS is installed on the NetMatrix recipient computer b mema Eel ee ee ce dl z a Lap ua i Example Viewing video in the NetMatrix Monitor application There are two ways in which NetMatrix triggered video can appear on a NetMatrix recipient e Another user wants to share important video and sends it from the surveillance system s Monitor application from Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS or from a custom made web page to the required NetMatrix recipient e The images are sent to the required NetMatrix recipient automatically when a predefined event occurs for example when a door sensor detects that a door is opened or when the Surveillance system detects motion in the video from a camera As part of the data exchange between computers on the NetDVMS NetMatrix system other computers exactly which computers are defined as part of the NetMatrix configuration are able to send commands to
169. ernet 1 Gbit recommended E IDE PATA SATA SCSI SAS 7200 RPM or faster Minimum 80 Gbyte free depends on number of cameras and recording settings DirectX 9 0 or newer required to run Playback Viewer application Microsoft NET 1 1 Framework required to run Recording Server Manager Microsoft NET 2 0 is required for the NVR Download Manager To run Ocularis Client Lite the following is required Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Microsoft Vista Microsoft NET framework Intel Core 2 Quad CPU 2 83 GHz 4 GB RAM and an ATI Radeon HD 2400 XT To run the NetPDA NetCell Server the following is required Internet Information Server IIS 5 1 or newer as well as Microsoft video Framework 1 1 Running as a 32 bit service application Grip To check which DirectX version is installed on a computer click Start select Run and type dxdiag When you click OK the DirectX Diagnostic Tool window will open version information is displayed near the bottom of its System tab Should the server require a DirectX update the latest versions of DirectX are available from http www microsoft com downloads Grip Information about how to verify install Microsoft video Framework and IIS versions is available in Installing amp Configuring the NetPDA NetCell Server 12 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetGuard EVS Operating System CPU RAM Network Graphics Adapter Hard Disk Space Software NetDVMS 6 5
170. erted in top left to bottom right order according to a first in first out principle Video feeds will remain in the position in which they were loaded when all four positions are used any new video feeds will replace the oldest image feeds If you select Insert Camera On Top new video feeds will always be displayed in the top left position while any previously received video feeds will be shifted one position forward and eventually be pushed out e Startup Mode Lets you select how the NetMatrix Monitor window should open when starting O With Full Screen the NetMatrix Monitor window will open in full screen mode e completely maximized without any title bar etc With Window the NetMatrix Monitor window will open in regular mode i e as a Scalable window with a title bar etc 205 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual 7 NetMatrix Monitor With Hidden the NetMatrix Monitor window will load in hidden mode in which you will not see the window until there is video to display You will however still be able to access the window by clicking the icon in Windows notification area also known as the system tray typically located in NetMatrix the bottom right corner of your screen a HO DA 1036 Example only your notification area may have different content Depending on your On Connect settings see the following a hidden NetMatrix Monitor window can automatically be restored to p
171. erver in a folder called Installers The Installers folder is located in the NetDVMS installation folder To install a feature from the Installers folder select the required language sub folder then double click the required installation exe file Grip You can find more language versions of the NetGuard EVS installer and additional language packs on the NetDVMS software DVD When a new feature has been installed on the surveillance system server you will see a confirmation dialog If required you can open the Download Manager from the dialog Making New Features Available through the Download Manager When you have installed new features such as NetGuard EVS language versions language packs etc they will by default be selected in the Download Manager and thus immediately be available to users via the welcome page You can always show or hide features on the welcome page by selecting or clearing check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure nrip You can change the sequence in which features and languages are displayed on the welcome page In the Download manager s tree structure simply drag items and drop them at the required position Hiding and Removing Features You can remove features in several ways e You can hide features from the welcome page by clearing check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure In that case the features will still be installed on the surveillance system server and by
172. es which should not be regarded as motion are considered acceptable noise hence the name of the slider With a high noise sensitivity very little change in a pixel is required before it is regarded as motion Areas in which motion is detected are highlighted in the preview image Select a slider position in which only detections you consider motion are highlighted As an alternative to using the slider you may specify a value between O and 256 in the field next to the slider to control the noise sensitivity setting Grip If you find the concept of noise sensitivity difficult to grasp try dragging the slider to the left towards the High position The more you drag the slider towards the High position the 50 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output more of the preview image becomes highlighted This is because with a high noise sensitivity even the slightest change in a pixel will be regarded as motion Motion Sensitivity The Motion Sensitivity slider determines how many pixels must change in the image before it IS regarded as motion The selected motion sensitivity level is indicated by the black vertical line in the motion level indication bar below the preview image The black vertical line serves as a threshold When detected motion is above the selected sensitivity level the bar changes color from green to red indicating a positive detection As an alternative to using th
173. es of events exist see About Input Events amp Output In the following you will see how to define an event based on NetDVMS detecting motion on a particular camera VMD simply means Video Motion Detection Once the VMD event is defined you will be able to select it when further configuring NetDVMS Note In addition to NetDVMS s motion detection some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion configured in the devices own software typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address Events based on motion detected on a device itself are not VMD Events they are input events since they are based on input from the device Note Your motion detection settings for the camera in question will entirely determine when motion is detected and thus when the VMD event will occur See the description of the Adjust Motion Detection window for more information Also note that in order not to generate an excessively high number of VMD events during periods with lots of motion a VMD event cannot occur more frequently than every five seconds To add a VMD event do the following 1 Inthe Administrator window click the I O Setup button This will open the I O Setup window 2 In the I O Setup window first select the device on which motion must be detected in order for the event to occur then click the Add VMD Event Motion Detection button fa eer eel ido ren aU er dogj AN el
174. esent on the server If NET Framework 1 1 as well as one or more later versions are present on the server Windows default settings may cause a later NET Framework version to be used instead of NET Framework 1 1 To verify change which NET Framework version is used do the following 1 Click Start and select Control Panel 2 Click Administrative Tools 3 Click Internet Information Services 4 Inthe Internet Information Services window s left pane locate and right click the Default Web Site item T internet Information Services BA local computar Web Sites dif Default Web Ste gt Default SMTP Viebual Server Example only content on your server may be different 5 Inthe resulting menu select Properties This will open the Default Web Site Properties dialog 14 NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual System Requirements On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 6 Select the dialog s ASP NET tab The NET Framework in use will be indicated in the ASP NET version field 7 If required change the ASP NET version to 1 1 4322 Dinah Web Siis Properties Ex Example only 8 Click OK 9 Close the Internet Information Services and Administrative Tools windows if still open NetPDA NetCell Client Operating Microsoft Windows Pocket PC 2003 2003 SE Mobile 5 0 System CPU Intel StrongARM or 100 compatible RAM Minimum 32 MB Network Ethernet 256 Kbit or higher recommended Graphics Minimum 320 x 200 16
175. esented with a welcome page From the welcome page users can download OnSSI client software and install it on their computers e Language packs which let users add additional language versions to their existing clients Users download such language packs from the welcome page e Users can connect to welcome page and log in to NetGuard which simply runs ina browser without any need for software installation e Various plugins Downloading such plugins can be relevant for users if your organization uses add on products with NetDVMS What Does the Welcome Page Look Like The welcome page Is a simple web page with links to downloading or running various features To view the welcome page simply open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to the following address http surveillance server IP address or hostname If the mage Server has been configured with a port number other than the default port 80 you must specify the port number as well separated from the IP address or hostname by a colon http surveillance server IP address or hostname port number The content of the welcome page is managed through the Download Manager therefore the welcome page will often look different across organizations Initial Look Immediately after you install NetDVMS the welcome page will provide access to two features Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard Clients This initial look of the welcome page is automatica
176. etGuard Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS Note The use of event notifications requires that at least one event has been specified for a device on your NetDVMS system the event does not have to be specified for the particular camera Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output Outputs The Outputs button opens the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window in which you are able to specify which outputs e g the sounding of a siren or the switching on of the lights should be associated with motion detection and or with output buttons for manually triggering output when the camera is selected in NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS Note The use of outputs requires that at least one event has been specified for a device on your NetDVMS system the event does not have to be specified for the particular camera You specify output events in the O Setup window accessed by clicking the I O Setup button in the Administrator window 44 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output PTZ Preset Positions PTZ Cameras Only Available only if the camera is a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera supporting PTZ preset positions the PTZ Preset Positions button opens PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window in which you are able to specify preset positions and patrolling for the camera Note If the Recording Server service is run
177. ets you edit which of the device s output ports the output is connected to Lets you edit the amount of time for which the output should be applied Specify the required amount of time in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Example The output should be kept for five tenths of a second Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information Lets you edit the name of the output Note Output names must not contain the following characters lt gt SOE N Note Some camera devices only support output names of a certain length and or with a certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details Testing the Defined Output When you have defined settings for the output in question you are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button Ports amp Polling The Advanced window lets you specify network settings to be used in connection with event handling 116 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Advanced Haket Salimos Ftp Server Port Abert Port SMTP Port Poling Frequency 1 10 rac The Advanced window Input Events amp Output Cancel JAccess You access the Advanced window by clicking the Advanced button in the O Setup window Advanced Window s Fields The Advanced window contains the following fields
178. ets you specify event buttons When specified event buttons become available in NetGuard EVS in NetGuard EVS event buttons are actually not buttons instead users manually trigger events by selecting them from a list Event buttons can be global available for all cameras or tied to a particular camera only available when the camera is selected 119 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Event Buttes ta Debra jarj A eae y 7 h pi Emi pi Erid og ajal Dar E I ajal Dar E ajal Eto ie E ida Cares dl E eis Carnes i Add rasa meri Access You access the Event Buttons window by clicking the Event Buttons button in the Administrator window Defined Events List The Event Buttons window features a list of specified event buttons When event buttons have been defined you are able to expand elements in the list by clicking to get an overview of all defined event buttons global event buttons as well as event buttons specified for individual cameras Example A Global Global event 1 it Timer event Y lA Back Door Camera 1 fa Front Door Camera 1 fA Lab Pl Camera 1 A Office Camera 1 led Evert 1 led Event 2 Expanded Defined Event list A global event button with an associated timer event has been specified Also two event buttons have been specified for an individual camera Specifying Event Buttons and Timer Events T
179. event notifications Grip The clients other two indicators serve the following purposes The red indicator lights up when motion has been detected and the green indicator is used for indicating that video is received from a camera The indicators in Ocularis Client Lite use a different color scheme Refer to the Ocularis Client Lite manual for more information Specifying Events for which Event Notification Should Be Used To specify which events should trigger an event notification for the camera do the following for each required event 1 Inthe Available Events list select the required event Grip You are not limited to events associated with a particular device You are able to select between all available events input events timer events event buttons from all cameras on the NetDVMS surveillance system 46 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Click the gt gt button to copy the selected event to the Active Events list When an event listed in the Active Events list occurs the yellow indicator in clients will light up 3 Repeat for each required event To remove an event from the Active Events list select the event in question and click the lt lt button Fisheye 360 Views Note Use of the fisheye technology requires a dedicated fisheye camera or a special fisheye camera lens with a special fisheye license key specified in the Edit Device Settings win
180. f User Manual Input Events amp Output Note Even though it is possible to specify a path to a network drive it is highly recommended that you specify a path to a local drive If using a path to a network drive it will not be possible to save to the database should the network drive become unavailable Grip If you have several cameras and several local drives are available performance can be improved by distributing the databases of individual cameras across the local drives e Incase of database failure take the following action Select which action to take if the database becomes corrupted The number of available actions depends on whether archiving has been enabled You enable archiving for a camera in the Archive setup window accessed from the Administrator window by clicking the Archive Setup button o Repair Scan Delete if fails Default action If the database becomes corrupted two different repair methods will be attempted a fast repair and a thorough repair If both repair methods fail the contents of the database will be deleted o Repair Delete if fails If the database becomes corrupted a fast repair will be attempted If the fast repair fails the contents of the database will be deleted o Repair Archive tf fails Available only if archiving is enabled for the camera If the database becomes corrupted a fast repair will be attempted If the fast repair fails the contents of the database will be archived
181. f User Manual System Requirements Microsoft Windows XP Professional 32 bit or 64 bit and Windows Server 2003 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Business 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit and Windows Vista Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit Intel Core2 Duo minimum 2 4 GHz or higher Minimum 512 MB 1 GB recommended for larger views 1 GB recommended on Microsoft Windows Vista Ethernet 100 Mbit or higher recommended AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 recommended 16 bit colors Minimum 100 MB free Microsoft NET 2 0 Framework and DirectX 9 0 or newer Running as a 32 bit service application Grip To check which DirectX version is installed on a computer click Start select Run and type dxdiag When you click OK the DirectX Diagnostic Tool window will open version information is displayed near the bottom of its System tab Should the server require a DirectX update the latest versions of DirectX are available from http www microsoft com downloads Operating System CPU RAM Network Graphics Adapter NetGuard Operating System CPU RAM Ocularis Client Lite Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Windows Vista Ultimate Intel Core2 Duo minimum 2 4 GHz or higher Minimum 1 GB Ethernet 100 Mbit or higher recommended PCI Express 256 MB RAM Direct 3D support Microsoft Windows XP Professional 32 bit or 64 bit and Windows Server 2
182. f selected default this setting will show camera information in the NetMatrix Monitor window This allows camera names or camera IP addresses to be displayed even if the NetMatrix Monitor window is running in full screen mode The same image with and without camera information e Keep Video Aspect Ratio If selected default this setting will keep the original aspect ratio i e height width relationship when the NetMatrix Monitor window is resized If this setting is not used video will be stretched to fill the available space The same image with left and without right original aspect ratio Note how keeping the original aspect ratio often leads to black bars around the video whereas stretching may distort the video slightly e Reconnect On Startup If selected default the NetMatrix Monitor will automatically attempt to connect to the last connected camera when starting If this setting is not used no camera connection will be attempted at startup 204 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual NetMatrix Monitor e Camera Layout Lets you select whether the NetMatrix Monitor window Should run in 1X1 or 2X2 mode In 1X1 mode the NetMatrix Monitor window is capable of displaying video feeds from a single camera at a time In 2X2 mode default the NetMatrix Monitor window is capable of showing video feeds from up to four cameras at a time If using 2X2 mode the video feeds will be ins
183. figure your system Device Manager Section The Device Manager section located in the middle of the Administrator window lists all added devices with attached cameras microphones and speakers The Device Manager section thus provides you with an overview of your surveillance system 22 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Device Manage SBE Back Dom 1010 69 31 Ta Camera 1 oe Meeting Riom 110 1015301109 Ta Cames 1 Ta Cometa 2 Ta Canna 3 Ta Camera 4 Detail from the Administrator window s Device Manager section two devices have been added the first device has a single camera attached whereas the second device has four cameras attached Until you have added devices the Device Manager section will be empty Adding Devices You add devices through an intuitive Device Setup Wizard available by clicking the Administrator window s Add Device button see also How to Add a Device When devices have been added they will be listed in the Device Manager section Clicking the plus sign next to a device in the Device Manager section will list cameras attached to the device Editing Settings for Devices To edit settings for a device listed in the Device Manager section select the device then click the Edit device button to open the Edit device settings window Editing Settings for Cameras To edit the settings for a camera listed in the Device Manager section click
184. for controlling communicating with the camera devices connected to an NetDVMS system Video drivers are installed automatically during the installation of your NetDVMS system However new versions of the video drivers also called Driver Packs are released from time to time We therefore recommend that you visit www onssi com and download the latest Driver Pack Upgrading NetGuard EVS NetGuard EVS users should now remove their old NetGuard EVS versions and install the new one 1 On the required computers open Windows Add or Remove Programs dialog Start gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs In the Add or Remove Programs dialog select the NetGuard EVS entry and click the Remove button A wizard window will open Follow the wizard s steps and click Finish when ready Now open a browser and connect to NetDVMS at the following address http IP address or hostname of server Image Server port number default is 80 Example http 123 123 123 123 80 From the welcome page that appears download and install the latest NetGuard EVS version If required download and install any NetGuard EVS plugins needed 21 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Administration For users without administrator rights access to certain features in NetDVMS may in some organizations have been restricted When this is the case you will be asked to specify the administrator
185. from the Acministrator window Select a speaker in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then click the Settings button e Device name Displays the name of the speaker If required you are able to overwrite the existing speaker name with a new one e Enabled Lets you enable disable use of the speaker Grip You can also enable disable a speaker in the Administrator window Right click the required Speaker in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then select Disable or Enable from the menu that appears Note On some devices a speaker can also be enabled disabled on the device itself typically through the device s own configuration web page If a speaker on a device does not work after enabling it in the Administrator application you should thus verify whether the problem may be due to the speaker being disabled on the device itself 76 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Download Manager Access Client Availability The Download Manager lets you manage which NetDVMS related features your organization s users will be able to access from a targeted welcome page on the surveillance system server JAccess You access the Download Manager from Windows Start menu Select All Programs gt NVR Download Manager gt NVR Download Manager Examples of User Accessible Features e With a standard browser users connect to the surveillance server where they are pr
186. g specifying a patrol scheme with only one preset position is possible A patrol scheme with only one preset position can when combined with scheduling be useful in two cases For moving a PTZ camera to a specific position at a specific time and for moving a PTZ camera to a Specific position upon manual PTZ control of the camera Note When you have defined your patrol schemes also remember to schedule use of the patrol schemes in the Camera Alert Scheduler window Note Bear in mind that patrolling can be overridden if operators with the necessary user rights manually control PTZ cameras Patrol Scheme A PTZ camera may patrol according to several different patrol schemes For example a PTZ camera in a supermarket may patrol according to one patrol scheme during opening hours and according to another patrol scheme when the supermarket is closed The Patrol scheme list lets you select which patrol scheme to configure Defining a New Patrol Scheme To define a new patrol scheme click the New button This will add a New patrol scheme listing to the Patrol scheme list To change the name from New patrol scheme to a name of your choice select the New patrol scheme listing and click the Rename button Copying an Existing Patrol Scheme If you want to create a new patrol scheme based on an existing one you can copy the existing patrol scheme 61 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Ou
187. g the camera s recordings should be kept how much data to store etc You specify this information in the following fields e Max records in database Select this option to limit the database size based ona maximum allowed number of records in the database Specify required maximum number of records in the neighboring field When the database reaches the maximum number of records the oldest record in the 41 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output database will automatically be overwritten A database can contain up to 600 000 records e Max timespan in database Select this option to limit the database size based on the age of records in the database Specify the required number in neighboring field and select required unit Minutes Hours or Days from the list When records become older than the specified number of minutes hours or days they will automatically be deleted Note A database can contain no more than 600 000 records regardless of what maximum age has been defined Grip You will receive a message if based on the recording frame rate you have specified for the camera NetDVMS detects that the maximum number of allowed records in the database is likely to be reached before the end of the specified time span e Clear Database Click button to delete all records stored in the database for the camera in question WARNING Use with caution all records in the data
188. generic event or event button under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred or the event button under which they have been defined has been clicked Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only e A camera starts recording based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the recording after 15 seconds e Lights are switched on and a camera starts recording based on a VMD event i e when motion is detected a timer event stops the recording after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes Hipa Tirar a Teal era e Tsi Operar Tica peca Fi Tea everd ecu e 0 Seconds T Mirada DK Cancel The New Timer window Access You are able to access the New Timer window in three ways If dealing with input and VMD events in the O Setup window When you click the plus sign next to a device in the window s Defined events list and select a defined event you are able to click the Add new event button to access the New Timer window If dealing with event buttons in the Event Buttons window When selecting an already specified event button in the Defined Events list you are able to click the Add new event button to access the New Timer window If dealing with TCP and or UDP based events in the Generic Events win
189. gered when the occurs signal on the input sensor rises or falls when input e Low Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is J20 falling e High Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is 108 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Box rising For exact information about what constitutes a falling and a rising signal respectively refer to documentation for the sensor and device in question External Lets you specify a name for the input event event name Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt SEN a Note Some camera devices only support event names of a certain length and or with a certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details Send e mail Select check box to send an e mail alert when the input occurs if this event occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is image from selected camera Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the input event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list next to the check box Send SMS if Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs this event occurs Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must ha
190. gnal on the input sensor rises High or falls Low e External event name Specify a name for the event Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt Y e Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send e mail if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window If requiring an image recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box e Optional If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send SMS if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window 4 In the I O Setup window your newly defined event is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing EO iip Tiie pr a Pore is E a apps gt fen ig b Us Tta ido rs aU rar A A dara el Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administrator window 243 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User
191. guage versions matching the language version of your NetDVMS system 253 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to The Download Manager s configuration is represented in a tree structure Example With an English version of NetDVMS the Download Manager s default configuration would be represented in a tree structure like this Download Manager pss Select which features users can download from the surveillance server Sed NetDVMS 6 5f 2 4 English EW NetGuard EVS Installer E 914 6d fi English 2 4 NetGuard Remote Client m English 61 14 NetGuard EVS Installer o EE NetGuard Remote Client aM Simplified Chinese W Spanish V NetGuard EVS Installer Bi 4 6d d NetGuard Remote Client 61 19 4 56 Download Manager s Tree Structure Explained e The first level of the tree structure simply indicates that you are working with NetDVMS e The second level refers to the languages in which the page is available In the example the page is available in English French Chinese and Spanish e The third level refers to the features which are or can be made available to users In the example these features are limited to NetGuard EVS and NetGuard e The fourth level refers to particular versions of each feature such as version 4 5e which are or can be made available to users e The fifth level refers to the language versions of the features which are or can be made avail
192. h may have separate timing devices power supplies etc camera time and NetDVMS system time may not correspond fully and this may occasionally lead to confusion As all images are time stamped by NetDVMS upon reception and exact date and time information for each image is thus already known it is recommended that you keep the Include Date and Time in Image check box cleared Should you want to use the Include Date and Time in Image feature it is recommended that you click the Synchronize Time button if available Clicking the Synchronize Time button will set camera time to system time but does not guarantee that camera time will match system time indefinitely Orip For consistent synchronization you may if supported by the camera auto synchronize camera and system time via a time server Preview Image When adjusting camera settings you are able to view the effect of your settings by clicking the Preview mage button located at the bottom of the window 64 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Clicking the Preview Image button will provide you with an image from the camera in question as it would look with the settings specified in the Camera Settings section When you have found the best possible camera settings click OK to apply the settings for the camera Archiving With the daily archiving feature in NetDVMS you are able to keep recordings for as long as required
193. h selection check box is not selected you must specify an archiving location for each camera This is further described under Static Archiving Archiving Locations for All Cameras Dynamic Archiving By selecting the Automatic path selection check box you can specify archiving locations for all selected cameras in one go to a number of drives on your network Archiving will take place dynamically to all selected drives This is further described under Dynamic Archiving Selects the check boxes for all cameras listed in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section Clicking the Set all button is thus a quick way to specify that archiving should apply for all cameras listed Remember that only when you click OK is archiving actually enabled for the selected cameras Clears the check boxes for all cameras listed in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section 72 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Field Button Set all paths Add target Static Archiving Clicking the Clear all button is thus a quick way to specify that archiving should not apply for any of the cameras listed Remember that only when you click OK archiving is actually disabled for the selected cameras Note This button is only available if the Automatic path selection check box is not selected Copies the selected path listing to all cameras listed
194. has been set up The regular patrolling of PTZ cameras may be interrupted either manually or when a particular event occurs The Patrolling settings section lets you specify how many seconds should pass before the regular patrolling is resumed after a manual or event based interruption Default is 30 seconds The settings in this section will apply for all installed PTZ cameras 81 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output IMPORTANT Users of NetGuard EVS are in addition to manual control able to stop a selected PTZ camera s patrolling entirely This takes place through a context menu in the NetGuard EVS view Therefore for NetGuard EVS users the number of seconds specified in the Patrolling settings section does only apply when users manually control a PTZ camera not when users stop a PTZ camera s patrolling entirely When NetGuard EVS users stop a PTZ camera s patrolling entirely the camera s patrolling will resume only when the NetGuard EVS user selects to resume it Grip PTZ patrolling for individual PTZ cameras is configured in the Setup PTZ Patrolling window Logfile Settings The Logfile Settings section lets you specify where to keep the general log files containing information about activity in the Administrator and recording server and how long for Separate log files are generated for the Administrator and recording server service Logfile Path By default the Adminis
195. hat in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window If requiring an image recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box e Optional If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send SMS if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window When ready click OK This will return you to the Generic Events window 4 Inthe Generic Events window your newly defined event is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the Generic item to see the listing Corn Coals rl rd Capra jua biy ero E ed Li ra rd Click OK to close the Generic Event window and return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the generic event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS Grip See also How to Test a Generic Event Output e g lights sirens etc connected to cameras or other devices can be triggered manually when viewing live video in NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard EVS e Inan OnSSI client output may be triggered by selecting the required output fr
196. hat the required output unit has been connected to the output port on the required camera or other device but that it has not yet been defined on your NetDVMS system If you have already defined the output on your system begin at step 5 1 Inthe Administrator window click the I O Setup button This will open the I O Setup window 2 Inthe I O Setup window first select the camera or other device to which the output unit is connected then click the Add new output event button 1 0 Setup Defined events e AXIS 221 Executive Office Cam 1 Reception Add new event Add new output event Add YMD Event Motion Detection Advanced This will open the Add New Output window 155 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output 3 Inthe Add New Output window the External output connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Now specify information in the following fields e Output connected on Select the camera device output port on which the output unit is connected Many cameras devices only have a single output port in that case simply select Output 1 e Keep output for Specify the amount of time for which the output should be active when triggered in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five second
197. he Event rule string section s Event message include field and nothing else e Search In order for the event to occur the received package must contain the message specified in the Event rule string section s Event message include field but may also have more content Example If you have specified that the received package should contain the terms User001 and Door053 the event will be triggered if the received package contains the terms User001 and Door053 and Sunday as your required terms are contained in the received package The same data package may be analyzed for different events The ability to assign a priority to each event lets you manage which event should be triggered if a received package matches the criteria for several events The priority must be specified as a number between O lowest priority and 1000 highest priority When NetDVMS receives a TCP and or UDP package analysis of the packet will start with analysis for the event with the highest priority This way when a package matches the criteria for several events only the event with the highest priority will be triggered In case a package matches the criteria for several events with an identical priority e g two events with a priority of 999 all events with the priority in question will be triggered 127 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Event Rule String Section Th
198. he patrolling scheme s preset positions within the number of seconds you specify If not false motion is likely to be detected Bear in mind that it takes longer for the PTZ camera to move between positions that are located physically far apart e g from an extreme left position to an extreme right position than between positions that are located physically close together 3 The total number of seconds between each preset position will be listed below the two fields PTZ Patrolling Actions on Detected Motion You are able to combine a PTZ patrol scheme with motion detection so that when motion is detected the PTZ camera will pause its patrolling and remain at the position where motion was detected for a specified period of time To use this feature do the following 1 Select the Disable patrolling schedule if motion is detected check box 2 Select whether the PTZ camera should resume patrolling e When a certain number of seconds has passed since first detection of motion regardless whether further motion is detected or e When a certain number of seconds has passed without further detection of motion 3 Specify the required number of seconds for selected option Example You may specify that the PTZ camera should go to the next preset position and resume patrolling when 10 seconds has passed without detection of motion PTZ Scanning PTZ scanning is supported on a few devices only If your device supports PTZ scanning the Se
199. ht of the Available Events list This will copy the selected event to the window s rightmost list in which events associated with the selected preset position are listed When the selected event occurs or when the selected event button is clicked the PTZ camera will automatically move to the required preset position You are able to associate a preset position with more than one event Simply repeat the process for each required association To end the association between a particular preset position and a particular event simply select the required event in the window s rightmost list and click the lt lt button 60 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output PTZ Patrolling Window Available only when dealing with a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera the Setup PTZ Patrolling window lets you configure patrol schemes for PTZ patrolling the automatic movement of a PTZ camera between several preset positions for the camera ter PT Pete Lg Pini e mi pal aa T m Pram marr mp i FIT Pum raim m F pr ed on pay 7 al Mig a ed ol A The Setup PTZ Patrolling window JAccess To access the Setup PTZ Patrolling window click the Setup button in Patrolling section of the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window Note To use patrolling you must have specified at least two preset positions for the PTZ camera in question Chip Although it is technically not patrollin
200. ication for the first time do the following 1 Double click the NetMatrix Monitor shortcut on your desktop This will open the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window 2 Specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor in the Password and Retype Password fields The password must match the password that has been specified for your NetMatrix Monitor on the surveillance system server consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Grip Memorize the password you will need it if you want to change your NetMatrix Monitor application s configuration at a later stage 3 Specify the port number on which your NetMatrix Monitor will listen for commands e g about connecting to a camera By default port 12345 is used The port number must match the port number that has been specified for your NetMatrix Monitor on the surveillance system server consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt 4 Specify which hosts other computers are allowed to send commands to your NetMatrix Monitor If commands from any host should be accepted simply select Allow All Hosts If only commands from particular hosts should be accepted leave the Allow All Hosts box cleared and do the following to add each required host 5 Specify the IP address of the host in the field below the large Allowed Hosts box in the right side of the window Grip To jump to the next IP address segment in the field press SPA
201. ices capable of handling several input events It lets you define which of the device s possible input events should be enabled and whether any alerts should be associated with enabled input events Lntrigdo hago Fo 111 Ppi rrii A E iya Aris br il Paid ar C ent Amr pra ee ira 7 le ae or rpa l F Y a a FEELEEEt 11442341 The Multiple Input Events window Note Before you specify input events for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used JAccess You access the Multiple Input Events window by clicking the Add new event button in the I O Setup window Note that this only applies when the device selected in the I O Setup window is capable of handling several input events Some devices are capable of handling a single input event only in which case a different window the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only will open when the Add new event button is clicked 111 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Multiple Input Events Window s Fields and Buttons The Multiple Input Events window contains the following fields and buttons Field Description Input events for device Av
202. idual cameras and audio sources listed in the Device Manager section When a camera or audio source is disabled no video audio will be transferred from the camera audio source to NetDVMS To disable a camera or audio source right click the required camera or audio source in the Device Manager section then select Disable a Stairs 10 10 6911 o Camera r Disable Edt When a camera or audio source is disabled it will be indicated as follows ae Stars 10 10 63 11 To enable a previously disabled camera or audio source simply right click the required camera or audio source in the Device Manager section then select Enable a Stairs 10 10 69 1 GA Camera c Dial Enable a Edit Grip Individual cameras can also be disabled enabled in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window Individual audio sources can also be disabled enabled in the Microphone Settings window or Speaker Settings window respectively Administrator Window s Buttons The Administrator window features the following buttons Description Service Opens the Service Manager window which lets you pause resume Manager the Recording Server service Pausing the service is necessary in order to access some features for example configuration of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras IMPORTANT While the service is paused no video or audio will be recorded Scheduler Opens the Camera Alert Scheduler window in which you specify online p
203. ies if you want to edit the settings for an already configured camera Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window The Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window lets you specify settings for a particular camera 37 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Camera Settings for Canon Camera 1 um tame s per Second ei 0 25 second s btw mages Same as recording Database cette Max recorde n database Max timespan N database fe ardie sstomatcaly when database s fd Delete adheres olde then O deve 0 to use detal achive retina Detabase pat C deodata In case of database fabre take the tolera acon Repar Archive if fale magre Quaity Evert Notfcaters Ota PTs Preset Powter JAccess You access the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window from the Administrator window by selecting a camera in the Device Manager section then clicking the Settings button The Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window contains the following sections and buttons Speedup Settings Note Special settings apply for cameras using MPEG Read more at the end of the description of this section The Speedup Settings section lets you specify the required number of frames to be used when motion is detected and or an event occurs in this field e Required framerate Specify required number of frames in the first field and select req
204. iggering in an OnSSI client This is further described in How to Add a Manually Controlled Output 8 When ready click the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window s Exit button to return to the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 9 Inthe Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click OK to return to the Administrator window 10 Close the Administrator The defined output will now be triggered automatically when motion is detected by the selected camera Note that the automatic output triggering will be controlled entirely by your motion detection settings for the camera in question See the description of the Adjust Motion Detection window for more information NetMatrix NetMatrix allows distributed viewing of live video from any camera on any monitor on a network operating with NetDVMS access You access the NetMatrix Configuration window by clicking the NetMatrix button in the Administrator window The NetMatrix Configuration window has two tabs the Config tab lets you define individual computers on which it should be possible to view NetMatrix triggered content such computers are known as NetMatrix recipients the Event tab lets you define which events should trigger which actions in individual NetMatrix recipients Config Tab The Config tab is used for enabling NetMatrix functionality and for defining which computers to display NetMatrix triggered live video on A
205. ight clicking the name of the camera in question See more information under Administrator window Generic Events NetDVMS is able to analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and automatically trigger an event when specified criteria are met This way you are able to easily integrate your NetDVMS surveillance system with a very wide range of external sources for example access control systems alarm systems etc Events based on the analysis of received TCP and or UDP packets are called generic events NetDVMS listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window default is port 1234 To add a generic event do the following 1 Inthe Administrator window click the Generic Events button This will open the Generic Events window 2 Inthe Generic Events window first select the Generic item then click the Add new event button 228 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to Cekme Lepra This will open the Add New Event window for specifying generic events 3 Now specify information in the following fields Ada Hore Len E General Deen hiy Bafici eerie lyri Mpa l card feed fn ere rr Pe rta E gt Diario de Papa Evert ory ad SPTE f Dri il ee Eee nie er rect misting tee ae Pia BAG M ruri e Event name Specify a name for the event Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp e Event
206. imply click the required position in the preview picture The PTZ View section also features sliders allowing you to move the PTZ camera along each of its axes the X axis allowing you to pan left right the Y axis allowing you to tilt the camera up down and the Z axis enabling you to zoom in and out the camera will zoom in when you move the slider towards Tele and zoom out when you move the slider towards Wide As an alternative to clicking the required position in the preview or using the sliders you can use the PTZ camera navigation buttons Moves the PTZ camera up and to the left Moves the PTZ camera up Moves the PTZ camera up and to the right Moves the PTZ camera to the left Moves the PTZ camera to its home position Moves the PTZ camera to the right Moves the PTZ camera down and to the left Moves the PTZ camera down Moves the PTZ camera down and to the right Zoom out one zoom level per click Zoom in one zoom level per click a la le le EEE EER 57 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Preset Positions Section Having specified a camera position in the PTZ View section you define the required position as a preset in the Preset Positions section Button Description Check Box Use preset positions from device Set Position Edit Name Test Delete Move up Move down Available only for cameras supporting this feature Check box to use
207. in I O Setup window You may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the required device as well as the required main event to see the timer event A ral Mera Hutt owes vine vn Timer event associated with an event button listed in Event Buttons window You may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the required device as well as the required main event to see the timer event Timer event associated with a generic event listed in Generic Events window You may have to click the expand icon in front of the word Generic as well as the required main event to see the timer event Click OK to return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the timer event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc An event may also trigger several actions simultaneously 238 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to Grip If you are specifically looking for information about how to configure motion detection triggered activation of an output device only such as a siren a strobe light etc see How to Add a Motion Triggered Output Several typ
208. in NetDVMS any cameras attached to the device are automatically recognized by the software and listed in the Administrator window s Device Manager section Derice Manage Be Bock Doo 1010693 Ta Conesa 1 21 Meeting Room 10 10 5010 Th Comeza 1 To Camia 2 Ta Cana 3 Th Campa 4 Detail from the Administrator window s Device Manager section two devices have been added the first device has a single camera attached whereas the second device has four cameras attached To add a device use the following procedure Prerequisites You must have configured IP address password etc on the device itself as described by the manufacturer 1 Open the Administrator window 2 Inthe Administrator window click the Add Device button This will start the Device Setup Wizard 3 On the first step of the wizard identify the required device either by e Typing the IP address of the device Grip To jump to the next IP address segment in the field press SPACE on your keyboard OF 226 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to e Typing the DNS host name of the device This requires that you select the Use DNS host names box Device tatup Wizard a Pace pach infienation about a ads derrita Tha dra Pl e Pd ds hk He 50 Ab ES i Usa DHS hiat mama Dkk a Fal Se buon i otter hn HITE pat Bl eed FTF pot F e weed Por alo Caracuel Specifying the IP address of a device Note By
209. in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section If you use the same archiving directory for all cameras this can Save you having to manually specify identical paths for each camera Example You have specified the path C MyFiles MySurveillanceSystem for a camera To quickly use this path for all cameras select the path listing and click the Set all paths button Note The button is only available if the Automatic path selection check box is selected By clicking this button you can add a new archiving target When you click the button a path named New drive will appear in the list To specify a path simply click New drive to overwrite it The path you type must exist in the My Network Places folder Note that the path you type will not get a drive letter That is because it IS not a mapped drive If it had been a mapped drive it would already have been in the list L Surveillance Note You cannot delete a target you have added Instead if you clear a check box for a target you have added manually and click OK the target will not be on the list the next time you access the Archive setup window However the Archives folder at the target destination will remain available for viewing recordings Note Specifying archiving locations for individual cameras is only possible if you have not selected the Automatic path selection check box If the Automatic path selection check box is not selected a d
210. included when you click the Add button or one of the parenthesis or operator buttons Likewise you are able to position the cursor inside the field in order to determine where an item should be removed when clicking the Remove button The item immediately to the left of the cursor will be removed when you click the Remove button Adds the content of the Event substring field to the Event message include field the content of which will be used for the actual analysis See also the description of the Event substring and Event message 128 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Field Button AND includes fields Lets you add a Start parenthesis character to the Event message include field Parentheses can be used to ensure that related terms are processed together as a logical unit in other words they can be used to force a certain processing order in the analysis Example User001 OR Door053 AND Sunday In the example the two terms inside the parenthesis will be processed first then the result will be combined with the last part of the string In other words the system will first look for any packages containing either of the terms User001 or Door053 then it will take the results and run through them in order to see which packages also contain the term Sunday Lets you add an end parenthesis character to the Event message include field Lets you ad
211. indow 4 Inthe I O Setup window your newly defined output is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing Eo ei ap Thiij rr mid 0 2 oa Era a i en fh eer eee Aah rea cau ad dogj va AA dara ol Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administrator window 5 Inthe Administrator window first select the camera for which the output should be available then click the Settings button This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 6 Inthe Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Outputs button 235 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to eer a Settings Vet Sd Cae 1 E AE ene LAR a Emn rer h eer ss Fiji hl eee ja Peel cer iei Dees de ee ae ee oie E Las h ea Fe aie aire parj Feary rie id eae hee pe rral e OL ere er A Irai seria er der mu an e ra a del lego diaran A ora epa Le PET i durrah 1 mi jr ra a ee Wariri Dees Calle ee r b red me A Ha Deegan r al alar deta ras a cite g bl Cove am hram niler Pham F cmp y daa ar id ta Plier sim pmm Es das f Fada De a a vei Gh es nip l This will open the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 7 Inthe All Outputs list in the window s left side select the required output then click the gt gt button located
212. indows authentication current user o If using Windows based authentication which should not necessarily be based on the currently logged in Windows user tell users that the required authentication is Windows authentication User name Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication Remember that user names are case sensitive so make it clear to the users if any parts of their user names should specifically be upper or lower case 99 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output e Password Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication If using basic authentication users should enter their passwords exactly as you have specified them on the Image Server o Users with Basic authentication or Windows authentication will have the option of selecting Remember password which will help them speed up subsequent login procedures Inform users whether they are allowed to use this feature e Auto login Users will have the option of selecting Auto login in which case NetGuard EVS or Ocularis Client Lite will automatically start up and log in with the selected authentication method each time Windows is started for Basic authentication and Windows authentication this will require that Remember password is selected Inform users whether they are allowed to use this feature Define User Rights Window The Image Server s Define User Rights window lets yo
213. ine an cetacean ne as gto wee cdc eae a 118 Event DURONS Manual Triggenngi ses ounsa ates a ea oat a ell da lg cea 119 Event BUNONS WINO Were coat 119 DEE Er a a oe 120 Specifying Event Buttons and Timer Events ccecccccccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeecccccecoseneeeeeeeeeeesessccatedseneseeeceseseeensccacess 120 Editing Event Buttons and Timer Event ccccccccccssssseeeecesneesseeeeeaeeusseeeeseaeeesaeeeseseeaseeeeesessaseeeeeeesssesseeeeeenaas 121 Associating Event Buttons with External Outputs sisvaradaridasidida caida la land cada 122 Add New Event VIMGOW riere ers Aree anette As tet ole lensed IE 122 Add N w Event Window S Fields sesenta a a 122 Edt Event VWIMGOW Sasis Aaeeea o i 123 Edit EVent WINdOwW S Sl dons A 123 Generic EVEN crasu a a 124 Generic Events Window s Events List and BUuttOns c ceccccceceeseseeeeeeecaeeseeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeeaaaaeeeeseaueasaeseeesessaaaenees 125 O ae ea Oa E A NSE 126 General Eveni Settings SeCioN senari 126 ASA A e E E E 128 Notlication Scuinas Sec ais 130 a EAA aa ON EAE E E E E E E EEE N E ad 131 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Welcome General Eveni Settings o eclO Nereo eE seo sone eeamietomarecanel 132 Event hule SINGS SOCOM oraraa dde 133 NOtINCATIONSEHINGS Secion seiss ica 136 A O 137 Associating Events with Particular Outputs asii A iS A AAA AA 137 Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name WindOW oooooncnnincnnnncccccccnono
214. ing event buttons If you have selected a timer event clicking the Edit selected button will open the New Timer window 121 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Associating Event Buttons with External Outputs As is the case with input events see External Input Output you are able to associate an event button with specific external outputs This way external output for example the sounding of a siren can be triggered automatically when an event button is clicked Like with input VMD and generic events the association between event buttons and outputs is made in the I O Control window Add New Event Window The Add New Event window for adding event buttons lets you specify the settings for an event button idi thew ril 13 Lis eed oo Bes od sae ad ee Pregl al a A A JAccess You access the Add New Event window for adding event buttons from the Event Buttons window Select an entry either global or for a specific camera in the Defined Events list then click the Add new event button Add New Event Window s Fields The Add New Event window for adding event buttons contains the following fields Button Read only field displaying the name of the camera for which the related to event will be specified If the field displays Global the event button will be a global event button available for all cameras Manual Lets you specify a name fo
215. ing one Specify the port number to be used when sending commands to the NetMatrix recipient The NetMatrix recipient will listen for commands on this port By default port 12345 is used You are of course able to specify 245 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Field Check Description Box Button Password NetGuard EVS Clear Update Add Event Tab How to another port number Used when adding a new NetMatrix recipient or editing the properties of an existing one Specify the password to be used when communicating with the NetMatrix recipient NetMatrix triggered live video may also be displayed in NetDVMS users Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS If Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS is used distribution of the NetMatrix triggered live video takes place slightly differently Select check box if the NetMatrix recipient in question is using Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS Removes any content in the Name Address Port Password and NetGuard EVS fields Available only if you have edited the properties of an existing NetMatrix recipient Updates the properties of the selected NetMatrix recipient with the changes made during editing Available only if you have added properties of a new NetMatrix recipient in the Name Address Port Password and possibly NetGuard EVS fields Adds the new NetMatrix recipient to the list There are two ways in which NetMatrix
216. ip aa t E E rd a ered cocked rar eel Dejad cred The Add New Output window Note Before you specify output for a device verify that the output is supported by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the NetDVMS release note to verify that output is supported for the device and firmware used Access You access the Add New Output window by selecting the required device and clicking the Add new output event button in the O Setup window If the device does not support output the button will not be available Add New Output Window s Fields The Add New Output window contains the following fields External Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the output output event is defined connected to Output Lets you select which of the device s output ports the output is connected connected to Many cameras only have a single output port in that on case simply select Output 1 Keep output Lets you specify the amount of time for which the output should be for applied Specify the required amount of time in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Example The output should be kept for five tenths of a second Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively 114 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Short time for example max five seconds
217. ired topic The Search tab contains a number of advanced search features among these are the ability to quickly select and run previous searches the ability to search topic titles only as well as the ability to display search results ranked according to presumed relevance Links tn Help Topics The actual content of each help topic is displayed in the right pane of the help window Help topic texts may contain various types of links notably so called expanding drop down links Clicking an expanding drop down link will display detailed information The detailed information will be displayed immediately below the link itself the content on the page simply expands Expanding drop down links thus help save space If you wish to quickly collapse all texts from expanding drop down links in a help topic simply click the title of the topic on the help system s Contents tab Printing Help Topics To print a help topic navigate to the required topic and click the help window s Print button When you click the Print button a dialog box may ask you whether you wish to print the selected topic only or all topics under the selected heading When this is the case select Print the selected topic and click OK Grip When printing a selected help topic the topic will be printed as you see it on your screen Therefore if a topic contains expanding drop down links see Links in Help Topics above click each required drop down link to display the text in
218. ires that output has been defined in the O Setup window You have a high degree of flexibility when associating a camera with particular outputs e You are able to select between all available outputs i e outputs defined as output events for the camera itself as well as outputs defined as output events for other devices on the NetDVMS system e The same output may be used for manual control as well as for automatic triggering when motion is detected Selecting Output for Manual Control You are able to specify outputs to be triggered manually from a list in NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS To specify an output for manual triggering in an OnSSI client do the following 1 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Chip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 2 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way You are able to determine each output s position in NetGuard s and NetGuard EVS s output list by moving the selected output up or down in the On Manual Control list with the up and down buttons located to the right of the list
219. iving for all cameras in one go This will divide the bottom of the window into two sections Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply and Select drives for dynamic archives See descriptions below Lists specified archiving times Archiving will take place every day at the specified times Archiving once a day will normally suffice However if you expect the daily database per camera to exceed 40 GB or 600 000 records you should specify additional archiving times To add an archiving time to the list specify the required time in the Time to add field then click the Add button There must be at least one hour between each archiving time To remove an archiving time from the list select the archiving time to remove from the list and click the Delete button Note While archiving takes place cameras for which archiving applies will briefly stop recording one after the other Although the pause is very brief typically less than a second it is therefore recommended that you specify archiving times that are outside periods in which you expect to record important video Lets you add an archiving time to the Daily archiving times list You specify the required time by selecting the hour minute and second values respectively then clicking the field s up and down buttons to increase or decrease values Orip You may also simply overwrite selected hour minute or second values Adds the archiving time specifi
220. ix Monitor NetMatrix Monitor Window Shortcut Menu By right clicking anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window you get access to a shortcut menu Pull Screen w Always On Top Config Hide Weird The shortcut menu has the following options e Full Screen Lets you view the NetMatrix Monitor window in full screen mode i e completely maximized without any title bar etc To return to regular view simply select Full Screen again Grip To quickly toggle between viewing the NetMatrix Monitor window in full screen or regular view you can also simply double click anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window e Always On Top Forces the NetMatrix Monitor window on top of other windows on your screen e Config Lets you access the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window Note that before the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window opens you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor Password Validation El Ender Pazowcad o Cancel e Hide Window Sends the NetMatrix Monitor window to hidden mode in which you will not see the window until there are images to display You will however still be able to access the window by clicking the NetMatrix icon in Windows notification area also known as the system tray typically located in the bottom right corner of your screen OOSA Dx 10 Example only your notification area may have different content
221. l also be archived If the device is a video encoder with several channels audio will be archived with the camera on channel 1 Audio If you use audio sources i e microphones and or speakers on your NetDVMS system note the following e Only audio from microphones is recorded Only incoming audio i e audio recorded by microphones attached to cameras is recorded Outgoing audio e what NetGuard EVS operators say when they talk through speakers attached to cameras is not recorded e Audio from microphones is recorded even when video is not When a microphone is enabled see Microphone Settings Window audio from the microphone will be recorded whenever the associated camera is online i e transmitting data to NetDVMS see Camera Alert Scheduler Window regardless whether video from the camera is being recorded or not Depending on your cameras recording settings this may mean that when you play back recordings you may find that there are periods for which you only have audio recordings This will also be the case for exported recordings if audio has been included in the export e Audio recording affects video storage capacity When a microphone is enabled audio is recorded to the associated camera s database This will affect the database s capacity for storing video A camera s database can contain a maximum of 40 GB or 600 000 records It is thus important to bear in mind that the maximum limit of the database Is likel
222. l part of the surveillance system video streams are only transferred to NetDVMS while the Recording Server service is running The Recording Server Manager informs you about the state of the Recording Server service It also lets you manage the service 162 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output The Recording Server Manager s notification area a k a system tray icon indicates whether the Recording Server service is running or not Green indicates running default red indicates not running f By right clicking the icon you can start and stop the Recording Server service view log files etc Starting the Recording Server Service To start the Recording Server service do the following e Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon e Inthe menu that appears select Start Recording Server Service Stert Recording Server Service US Open Administrator Show System Status Show Recording Server Log File Show Image Server Log File Administrator Help Abt Exit Recording Server Manager e The icon in the notification area changes to green Stop the Recording Server Service To stop the Recording Server service do the following e Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon e Inthe menu that appears select Stop Recording Server Service Open Administrator Show System Status Show Recording Server Log File Show Image Ser
223. laced in the folder containing the NetDVMS software Image Server log files are named according to the structure SLog YYYYMMDD log e g ISLog_20070615 log Image Server Service Audit Log Files These files log NetGuard and NetGuard EVS user activity if audit logging is enabled in the mage Server Administrator A log file is created for each day with remote user activity Image Server audit log files are by default placed in a subfolder named SAuditLog under the folder containing the NetDVMS software Image Server audit log files are named according to the structure is_auditYyYYMMDD log e g is audit20070615 log Web Server Log Files These files log activity on the Web Server if logging is enabled in the NetDVMS HTTP Server window Web Server log files are by default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software Web Server log files are named according to the structure www_YYYYMMDD log e g www_ 20070615 log Image Import Service Log Files These files log activity regarding the Image Import service which is used for fetching pre alarm images and storing the fetched images in the database Pre alarm images is a feature available for selected cameras only it enables sending of images from immediately before an event took place from the camera to the surveillance system via e mail Image Import Service log files are by default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software Image Import Service log files are na
224. ld Description Some of the Select check box if any of the cameras attached to the video connected encoder device is a PTZ camera cameras are Pan Tilt Zoom If the check box is not available PTZ is not supported for the cameras device in question P T Z type Field available only if Some of the connected cameras are controlled Pan Tilt Zoom cameras check box is selected through COM1 If a PTZ camera is controlled through the COMI port on the video encoder device select the required PTZ camera type from the list If no PTZ cameras are controlled through the COM1 port select None P T Z type Field available only if Some of the connected cameras are controlled Pan Tilt Zoom cameras check box is selected through COM2 If a PTZ camera is controlled through the COM2 port on the video encoder device select the required PTZ camera type from the list If no PTZ cameras are controlled through the COM2 port select None 35 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Camera List and Fields The camera list contains a line for each camera channel on the device First line from the top corresponds to camera channel 1 second line from the top corresponds to camera channel 2 etc To change camera settings select the required camera channel from the list specify required information in the following fields and click the Apply button Camera Name Cam Number Camera Type
225. lete old archives if Space Is needed Send email on archive error you can overwrite this setting for a specific camera Note You can only change this option if the Automatic path selection check box see below is also selected If the Automatic path selection check box is not selected automatic deletion of old archives will always be active If you select this check box the oldest archives will automatically be deleted until there is enough space when new recordings are moved to the archives If you clear this check box and the archives are full your recordings will remain in the local database When the local database runs out of space the oldest recordings will be deleted Select check box if NetDVMS should send an e mail alert if archiving fails for example because the disk Is full Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window 70 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Field Button Send SMS on archive error Automatic path selection Daily archiving times Time to add Add Delete Select check box if NetDVMS should send an SMS mobile phone text message alert if archiving fails for example because the disk is full Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window Lets you select locations for arch
226. ll display either a 1x1 or a 2x2 view 207 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual NetMatrix Monitor e With 1x1 the NetMatrix Monitor window is capable of displaying video feeds from a single camera at a time r n z EE A g TE Pe JE i E e With 2x2 the NetMatrix Monitor window is capable of showing video feeds from up to four cameras at a time If using 2x2 the video feeds will be inserted in top left to bottom right order according to a first in first out principle Video feeds will remain in the position in which they were loaded when all four positions are used any new video feeds will replace the oldest video feeds A slightly different configuration is also possible in which case new video feeds will always be displayed in the top left position while any previously received video feeds will be shifted one position forward and eventually be pushed out es e i es me T m Camera Information Depending on configuration the NetMatrix Monitor window is able to show camera information immediately above images The same image with and without camera information 208 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual NetMatrix Monitor Image Aspect Ratios Depending on configuration video in the NetMatrix Monitor window can either be displayed with its original aspect ratio or be stretched to fill the available space The same image with left and
227. lly provided through the Download Manager s default configuration for more information see Default Configuration of Download Manager in the following 77 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual VIDEO clients Input Events amp Output Download Ocularis Client Lite OnSSI s breakthrough video client for its entire line of Network Video Recorders NetGuard Clients Download the NetGuard Clients OnSSI s feature rich display clients for its Network Video Recorders Default Configuration of Download Manager The Download Manager has a default configuration This ensures that your organization s users can access standard features without the surveillance system administrator having to set up anything The default configuration provides users with access to two features Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard clients in language versions matching the language version of your NetDVMS system The Download Manager s configuration is represented in a tree structure Example With an English version of NetDVMS the Download Manager s default configuration would be represented in a tree structure like this Select which features users can download from the surveillance server Sed NetDVMS 6 5f 2 4 English EW NetGuard EVS Installer E W 4 6d W English 2 9 NetGuard Remote Client El 4 5e GM NetGuard EVS Installer EF NetGuard Remote Client 2 4 Spanish V NetGuard EVS Installer N 1 14 NetGua
228. locally on the remote user s computer Installing NetGuard EVS NetGuard EVS can be installed in three ways e Download and Install NetGuard EVS from the surveillance system server e Install NetGuard EVS from the NetDVMS software DVD e Silent Installation Surveillance System Administrators Only Removing NetGuard EVS See Removing NetGuard EVS Where can find more information about NetGuard EVS Once installed NetGuard EVS has its own built in help system Alternatively refer to the NetGuard EVS User s Manual available on the NetDVMS software DVD Installation Typically you download NetGuard EVS from the surveillance system server then install it on your computer Alternatively your surveillance system administrator may ask you to install NetGuard EVS from a DVD see Installation from DVD 177 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients Note Surveillance system administrators can automatically get a NetGuard EVS installed on the surveillance system server this happens as part of the surveillance system server installation To download and install NetGuard EVS from the surveillance system server do the following 1 Verify that your computer meets NetGuard EVS s minimum system requirements 2 Open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to the surveillance system server at the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator When you are connected to
229. ly appear on NetMatrix recipients etc Events can also be used for activating output Output units can be attached to output ports on many devices allowing you to activate lights sirens etc from NetDVMS Such external output can be activated automatically by events or manually from NetGuard NetGuard EVS Ocularis Client Lite Types of Events You specify which types of input should generate which types of events Basically four types of events exist e On many devices you are able to attach external input units to input ports on the device Events based on input from such external input units typically sensors attached to doors windows etc are called input events Some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion for detecting moving and or static objects etc typically configured in the devices own software in which case you are also able to use such detections from the device as input events e Input may also be received in the form of TCP or UDP data packages which can be analyzed and if matching specified criteria used to generate events Such events are called generic events e Events may be based on NetDVMS detecting motion on a camera Such events are called VMD 1 e Video Motion Detection events e Finally events may be generated manually by users selecting them in their access clients Such manually selectable events are traditionally called event buttons Specifying Input Events and Outpu
230. m immediately to the left of a cursor positioned in the Event message include field If no cursor has been positioned in the Event message include field 135 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Field Description Button the last item in the field will be removed Notification Settings Section The Edit Event window for editing generic events contains the following fields in the Notification settings section Send Email if this event occurs Include image from camera Send SMS if this event occurs Select check box to send an e mail alert when the event occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window When you have edited the generic event click OK 136 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output I O Control In the I O Control window you are able associate particular events and event buttons with one or m
231. m the latest event is always displayed prominently 247 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to e Disconnect Disconnect the camera you will specify the actual camera in the next step Use if a particular event should cause video from a particular camera to stop being displayed in the NetMatrix recipient even if they are not yet old enough to be pushed out of the NetMatrix recipient When you have selected an action another red exclamation mark will indicate that there is still some configuration to be done ES alata Larda Did Moon on Beck Door Wes Wing Camera b 4 Right click the action to select which camera to apply the action on EA Alas Conta Display 3 Moon on Back Door Weal wing Camera E T Connect Caleta Connect Esc Door Bart Wir Camera a Back Door West Wing Corera E Erene Office Cam Corera 1 In this example we have specified that when motion is detected on Camera b the selected NetMatrix recipient should connect to Camera b ES Alam Cer dd Dir plas Motion on Pack Doo Wierd no Camera b Hp Connect Back Door Went ingl Comes bl 5 Repeat as required Bear in mind that you define events and actions for a single NetMatrix recipient at a time You must have a Device License Key DLK for every device IP network camera or IP video server installed on your NetDVMS surveillance system Remember that you are allowed to install and use only the number
232. med according to the structure magelmportLog_YYYMMDD log e g IlmagelmportLog20070615 log Export Log Files These files log activity regarding database export from the Viewer A log file is created for each day on which export was performed Export log files are by default exported databases as well as the export log file are placed in an Exported Images folder on the desktop of the computer on which the export was performed Note however that the export location may be changed as part of the export process Export log files are named according to the structure ExportYYYMMDD log e g Export20070615 log Note however that database exports may be encrypted and or compressed in which case export log files are also encrypted compressed and further file extensions such as mzi or men may appear in export log file names 214 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Log File Structures NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Device Drivers Most log files generated by NetDVMS use a shared structure complying with the W3C Extended Log File Format Each log file consists of a header and a number of log lines e The header outlines the information contained in the log lines e The log lines consist of two main parts the log information itself and an encrypted part The encrypted part makes it possible through decryption and comparison to assert that a log file has not been tampered with Integrity Checks and Possible Error Messages Log
233. mouse pointer over a camera in the status window to view detailed information about the camera in question The information updates approximately every 10 seconds E Status otg Eaa Entrance Camera 1 Parking Area Camera 1 E Test 1 Camera 1 a Wes Entrance Cameo asolution 704x576 164 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output e Resolution Shows the resolution of the camera e FPS Shows the number of frames per second a k a frame rate currently used by the camera The number updates each time the camera has received 50 frames e Frame count Shows the number of frames received from the camera since the Recording Server was last started e Received KB Shows the number of kilobytes sent the by camera since the Recording Server was last started e Offline Indicates the number of times the camera has been offline due to an error Viewing the Recording Server Log File To view the recording server log file do the following 1 Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon 2 Inthe menu that appears select Open Recording Server Log File For more information about log files see About Logging Viewing the I mage Server Log File To view the Image Server log file do the following 1 Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon 2 Inthe menu that appears select Open Image Server Log File For more information about l
234. mp Server The NetPDA NetCell Client and NetPDA NetCell Server applications enable remote access to the NetDVMS surveillance system via a PDA Personal Digital Assistant a handheld computer device with a wireless connection Handheld remote access can be highly valuable in many situations For example first responders to break ins fires etc will be able to view live as well as recorded video of the incidents while on their way to the incidents wireless connection permitting E ol 1 Camera i 4 I AO Gre Example Live viewing in the NetPDA NetCell Client NetPDA NetCell Server The NetPDA NetCell Server is installed on an Internet Information Services IIS server and is used as a front end to the NetDVMS system s Image Server The NetPDA NetCell Server handles login and session requests between the NetPDA NetCell Client and the Image Server The NetPDA NetCell Server also handles resizing of surveillance video to fit the screen layout of the NetPDA NetCell Client 182 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients NetPDA NetCell Client The NetPDA NetCell Client is used for viewing live and recorded video from the NetDVMS Surveillance system on the PDA Moving on See system requirements for the NetPDA NetCell Server and NetPDA NetCell Client under System Requirements Everything else you need to know about the NetPDA NetCell Server and NetPDA NetCell Client is descri
235. n minutes to pass between the sending of each e mail alert per camera Note that this interval only applies for e mail alerts generated by detected motion or database related events e mail alerts generated by other types of events will still be sent out whenever the events occur Examples If specifying 5 a minimum of five minutes will pass between the sending of each motion or database related e mail alert per camera even if motion or database events are detected in between If specifying 0 e mail alerts will be sent each time motion or database events are detected potentially resulting in a very large number of e mail alerts being sent If using the value 0 you should therefore consider especially the motion detection sensitivity configured for each camera in the Adjust Motion Detection window Testing Your E Mail Alert Configuration You are able to test your e mail alert configuration by clicking the Test button This will send a test e mail to the specified recipients If Include Image is selected the test e mail will have a test JPG image attached 87 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Image Server Administration The Image Server provides access to the surveillance system for remote users logging in with NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS If the NetPDA NetCell Server front end is installed the Image Server also handles access for NetPDA NetCell Client user
236. n Motion Detected list Grip See also About Input Events amp Output PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom Available only when dealing with a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera supporting PTZ preset positions the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window lets you view and for many but not all PTZ cameras define preset positions for the PTZ camera ran The PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window 54 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output 5 Access To access the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window click the PTZ Preset Positions button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window The button is only available if the camera supports PTZ preset positions Note that if the Recording Server service is running the button will not be available see the description of the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window for information about how to make the button available Why Use Preset Positions Defined preset positions can be used for making the PTZ camera automatically go to particular preset positions when particular events occur and for specifying PTZ patrolling schemes Defined preset positions will also become selectable in NetGuard NetGuard EVS Ocularis Client Lite allowing users of these applications to move the PTZ camera to the preset positions Absolute and Relative Positioning PTZ Cameras
237. n clicking the Check Names button may be enough to quickly select the user Johnathan Smith e When ready click OK The required users and or groups will be imported and listed in the User administration window A user imported this way will appear as a Windows or Active Directory User in the list s Type column The user will furthermore be indicated by a user icon without the blue dot used for Basic users A group imported this way will appear as a Windows or Active Directory Group in the list s Type column The group will furthermore be indicated by a group icon How to Edit an Existing User Name or Password Editing an existing user s user name or password is only possible if the user in question is of the type Basic user the details of Windows users imported from Active Directory are edited through Active Directory To edit the user name or password for an existing Basic user do the following e Select the required user in the Current users list and click the Change password button e Edit the user name and or password as required then click OK Remember to inform the user about the change How to Remove an Existing User To remove a user from the User administration window s list of users select the user in the list and click the Delete button When removed from the list the user will no longer be able to log in Note Using this method to delete a Windows user imported from Active Directory will only remove the user s
238. name of the selected camera or other device If you are adding a globally available event button the field will display Global 142 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Add Hap Leer Poli made Ea mil Cm a E A reer rae EA Lora esa En rar cet MAA ei ered SS A eer oc OF Carcel Now specify information in the following fields e Manual event name Specify a name for the event button Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp e Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send e mail if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window If requiring an image recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box e Optional If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send SMS if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window When ready click OK This will return you to the Event buttons window 4 Inthe Event Buttons window your newly defined event button is now listed
239. nce system through NetGuard EVS Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard If your users will access the surveillance system with a NetPDA NetCell Client add the users as Basic users instead You add a new Windows user or group by importing information about the user group from a local database on the surveillance system server or from Active Directory e Inthe User administration window click the Add Windows User button This will open the Select Users or Groups window i Select Users or Groups AF Seed ho ee pps Lita Giiteagre el Bula socia purgas Chad Types From thes beac ation Enia Dreti LOCA Enba tha obiad manes do select cick _ Advanced _ Cancel By default you will be able to make selections from your entire directory If you want to narrow this click the Select Users and Groups window s Locations button and select the location you require 97 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output e Inthe Enter the object names to select box type the required user or group names then use the Check Names feature to verify that the user and or group names you have entered are recognized Note If typing several user and or group names separate each name with a semicolon Example Alonso Sarah Walters Management Brian Security Hannah Carter Stanislaw Dwayne Smith Grip Typing part of a user or group name is often enough Example Typing John the
240. nd follow the installation instructions For surveillance system administrators it is possible to deploy Ocularis Client Lite to users computers using tools such as Microsoft Systems Management Server SMS Such tools let administrators build up databases of hardware and software on local networks The databases can then among other things be used for distributing and installing software applications such as Ocularis Client Lite over local networks 1 Locate the self extracting Ocularis Client Lite installation exe file You find the file in a subfolder under the folder httpdocs The httpdocs folder is located under the folder in which your surveillance software is installed Example of a relevant subfolder under the httpdocs folder httpdocs Ocularis Client Lite Installers 3 With an extraction tool such as WinZip or similar extract the files contained in the installation file to a folder of your choice When extraction is done the folder to which you extracted will contain a small number of files among these a file with the extension msi The msi file is a Microsoft Windows Installer installation package covering the complete Ocularis Client Lite installation procedure 4 You can now use your systems management tool to deploy the msi file Alternatively you can simply copy the msi file to required computers and run the msi file from a command prompt NetGuard NetGuard provides users with access to the
241. ndered view down Moves the fisheye rendered view down and to the right Zoom out one zoom level per click Zoom in one zoom level per click Ceiling Mounted Cameras If the camera is mounted on a ceiling you can adjust the behavior of the navigation buttons to reflect this by selecting the Ceiling Mount check box Setting a View as Home Position When previewing the fisheye rendered view you are able to set a particular position in the fisheye rendered view as the camera s PTZ home position Navigate to the required position using the navigation buttons then click the Set View as Home Position button Image Resolution Image resolution values are automatically displayed in the lower part of the window next to the navigation buttons When using fisheye image resolution will automatically be set to the highest available resolution Motion Detection The Adjust Motion Detection window lets you specify motion detection sensitivity for a specific camera Depending on your configuration motion detection sensitivity settings may determine when recordings from the camera are transferred to the surveillance system when alerts are generated when external outputs such as lights or sirens are triggered etc 49 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Motion detection sensitivity is therefore a key element in your NetDVMS surveillance solution and time spent on finding the best pos
242. ng In to the NetPDA NetCell Cle int iaa 193 VIEWNO LIVE Vid CO ix ign orca sited eee reates wear A ida 193 Selecting a Camera for Live Viewing sssrinin aa aaa a aE i aa aaia aid a A a 194 eS CROC VIEW osiada RTE A E E A ESE ee had EE E ates bee Sanne 195 PTZ CONTON e A 195 PTZ Prese ROSON S ad E ay cinta e ab dl A Gees 196 OUPU CONTO E N E A E E acc 196 Retumind tothe Camera List ra a 196 Viewing Recorded WIC CO id da dales ao 196 Selecting a Camera for Viewing Of RecordingS oooccccncnnncccccconoononacnccnnnnononnoonnnnnnnncnnnnnnnononononnnnnnrnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 197 Browsing and Playing Back Recorded Video cccccoooononnconononnnoccnononnonanonencnnonononononnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnancnnennaneness 197 Finding Recordings from a Specific Time and Date oooononinininininncinecnnenenenenenenenennnnnonononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninininnns 198 Finding Recordings from a Specific Er ienwid devine demi Nitderinnlenutdiniinareisiess 198 PUSS CFECM VIEW naa ek ees oan tae Joa re ees aus heat arear lee aed ares oe ase car ee tno awe ayer ela ar ere nwieee hada ecu agen stand 199 Reto 10 the Camera List Pade kc ii A ATA AA A ii 199 Logging Out of the NetPDA NetCell Client oooooooconnnnnonnncncccnocononancnconononcnnnnnonononanrnnnnnnnnnnnnronnnrnrnnnnanrnnennnnnnnos 199 VIENE Fi a A cai 200 NETMATRIX MONITO sana 201 Firer TIMES COMIQUEROS 203 Changing the Configuration of a Running NetMatrix MonitOFr cccc
243. ng Relevant For very large NetDVMS installations and or for installations with many megapixel cameras it can be relevant to change Windows settings so that only 1 GB of virtual memory is reserved for the operating system kernel leaving 3 GB for running processes If using Windows default setting with only 2 GB virtual memory reserved for running processes it has been seen that the Recording Server service in very large installations of NetDVMS may e Behave erratically if getting very close to the 2 GB virtual memory limit Symptoms can include database corruption and client server or camera server communication errors e Become unstable and crash if exceeding the 2 GB virtual memory limit During such crashes the code managing the surveillance system databases is not closed properly and databases will become corrupt In case of a crash Windows will normally restart the Recording Server service However when the Recording Server service is restarted one of its first tasks will be to repair the databases The database repair process can in some cases take several hours depending on the amount of data in the corrupted databases If you experience such problems and you run NetDVMS 6 5d or newer making Windows use 3 GB for running processes is likely to solve the problems If you have not experienced such problems but you run NetDVMS 6 5d or newer and your NetDVMS installation is very large and or features many megapixel cameras
244. ng two components on the server Removing these components will not remove your configuration files 1 2 4 From Windows Start menu select Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs Remove NetDVMS or the lower product When asked if you want to remove database files or registry settings you should normally not select any of the check boxes You may choose to remove database files if you wish but removing registry settings may mean that the new software version will not be able to utilize the existing configuration Remove Video Device Driver Pack Vx x where x x refers to the version number Installing the New Version Once the old version of the software is removed you can run the installation file for the new software version Select the installation options that best fit your needs There are some recent software changes that you should be aware of It is now possible to install the software as a service and as of NetDVMS 6 5 this is the only option since the Monitor application has been discontinued When the software runs as a service the Recording Server runs as a background process and any viewing either locally or remotely will be done through either NetPDA NetCell Client Ocularis Client Lite NetGuard EVS or NetGuard The HTTP Server Realtime Feed Server very basic alternative to NetGuard EVS NetGuard can only be used when the software is installed as an application Since installing as an application i
245. ning the button will not be available To make the button available pause the Recording Server service by clicking the Administrator window s Service Manager button then clicking the Pause button IMPORTANT No video or audio will be recorded while the Recording Server service is paused Editing Camera Name Number The Camera Name and Number window lets you edit the name of a selected camera and if required assign a shortcut number to the selected camera Access You access the Camera Name and Number window from the Administrator window s device Manager section Right click the name of the required camera then select Edit from the menu that appears The Camera Name and Number window contains two fields Camera Name Camera Number Displays the name of the camera If required you are able to overwrite the existing camera name with a new one Users of NetGuard EVS can take advantage of a range of keyboard Shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify each camera Each camera s shortcut number is specified in the Cam Number field Shortcut numbers must be unique for each camera A camera shortcut number must not contain any letters or special characters and must be no longer than eight digits Examples of correct camera shortcut numbers 3 12345678 Examples of incorrect camera Shortcut numbers A 3 123456789 Note Camer
246. nnconcnnnnnnnonnononnnnnncnnnnnonnnnonnnnonnnos 138 Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected Motion 0 00 0 li nn 138 HOWTO cds 140 How to Adda mil pul Based EVO estadal ile dis 140 Few to Addran Event BURON sarsari s e A nO e vies 141 POW tO ACG a UMD EVO A A ances eta eee dant 144 How OAJda Generne EVEN ri tel 145 HOw to Added TIME Eveni iser A E E E E EEA E 149 How to Add a Manually Controlled Output iiisescssssesssstvasca cer cnncuersvainavanudiarigescwssvaiedn snslaeirawtn tasvabtalcncemivanninaserenenunpundedoeds 151 Flow to Adda Motion Triggered Output sisi er a a a a E 155 NETA TRAD att das 158 Sl RT E ances eta A E E ceases eee E ban T AE E eed ace T cone nie coset naesene nese anaemia tances 158 EVEN Ta A acheter eee st ee en A ahs EAS aah Jae Ro ena aa ads 160 MONITOR orando 162 RECORDING SERVER SERVICE cuicos 162 Using ihe Recording Server Ma a ia 162 Starting the Recording Server Service iii ib 163 Stop th Recording Server SSVICE raras 163 Opening the N etDVMS Application o 164 WSK alive diate System StU gt gee re eee acia 164 Viewing the Recording Server Log File haueri a a a i e a i d e a 165 Viewing the Image Server Log File cc ese A EEA Sa eee EOS AES nals 165 Accessing the Built in Help Syste Mii ii a AAA AAA AA AAA 165 Viewing Information about NetDVMG csesesessesesssesssesssssssssssssssssssssssssesesesesesesesesesecesesesessseeseseseseseseseeess 165 Exiting th Recording se
247. nning various features To view the welcome page simply open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to the following address http surveillance server IP address or hostname If the mage Server has been configured with a port number other than the default port 80 you must specify the port number as well separated from the IP address or hostname by a colon http surveillance server IP address or hostname port number The content of the welcome page is managed through the Download Manager therefore the welcome page will often look different across organizations Initial Look Immediately after you install NetDVMS the welcome page will provide access to two features Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard Clients This initial look of the welcome page is automatically provided through the Download Manager s default configuration for more information see Default Configuration of Download Manager in the following VIDEO clients Download Ocularis Client Lite OnSSI s breakthrough video client for its entire line of Network Video Recorders Default Configuration of Download Manager The Download Manager has a default configuration This ensures that your organization s users can access standard features without the surveillance system administrator having to set up anything The default configuration provides users with access to two features Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard clients in lan
248. nnnnnnnnnnenenenos 21 updating Video Device DIV Sn 21 Upgrading NeiGuardsE V Sa eel ee ee ee ee ee 21 ADMINISTRATION cnt a a aada 22 ADMINISTRATOR MND O ica 22 Device Manager oe cio cis id ida 22 ADDING IO VICES A orcas 23 EDITING SETTINGS FOR DEVICES dida 23 EDITING SETTINGS FOR CAMERAS coccococcncononcononrnnoncnnnnrnnnnrnrn rre 23 Renaming LAMA do ae rer 23 Assigning Shortcut Numbers to Cameras cooccocccocococononnncononnnnnnnnnnn 24 EDITING SETTINGS FOR AUDIO SOURCES ju ccsceccecescecnscecnececuccecuceececnececescecnscecuececuseecuseeceensceeesaess 24 DISABLING ENABLING CAMERAS AND AUDIO SOURCES cecescscecnceccececncnscececncnensceceenenseeenenenssaees 24 Administrator Window s BULIONS 25 eee ee a a ee es ha en bien eee 25 DEVICES ADERS ia dia 29 HOW FO AO ADA a e a a 29 Edit DEVICE SE HINGS WINOW tania lili 32 Identity Video Device SEC NA ee 32 Network Settings for Video Device SectiON ccccccccnnoococonncononnnnnnconononnonnnncnncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnrnrnnananrnnnnnanenoss 34 P T Z Camera Selection A td 35 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Welcome Gamera Lis tandil uno des casa tencuesens op dra 36 GAMER AS nin T a coche D a EEA 37 Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name WindOW ccccccccesesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesesesaaaseaenees 37 SCC CUTS SUIS oia dat neva ne 38 Recording SS CHIN OS ta ede oe ata A A E A a eciela caren Meio jae 38 EVG IIs AP
249. nse key for using the fisheye technology obtained when registering the software Note This information is only required if the Enable Fisheye check box is selected manually 33 NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Network Settings for Video Device Section The Network Settings for Video Device section contains the following fields P address IP address or DNS host name of the device in question Or Note If Use DNS host name check box is selected the name of the IP address field changes to DNS Host Name in order to DNS Host accommodate a DNS host name rather than an IP address Name Use DNS By selecting the check box you are able to use a DNS host host name name for identifying the device instead of using the device s IP address When the check box is selected the IP address field changes its name to DNS Host Name ready to accommodate a DNS host name rather than an IP address Default When selected HTTP traffic to the device will go through the Http Port default port port 80 If you want to use another port for HTTP traffic to the device clear the check box and specify required port number in the field to the left of the check box Default Ftp When selected FTP traffic to the device will go through the Port default port port 21 If you want to use another port for FTP traffic to the device clear the check box and specify required port number in the field to the
250. nside the help topics Contents Tab The Contents tab lets you navigate the help system based on a tree structure Many users will be familiar with this type of navigation from for example Windows Explorer Search Tab The Search tab lets you search for help topics containing particular terms of interest For example you can search for the term camera and every help topic containing the term camera will be listed in the search results Clicking a help topic title in the search results list will open the required topic The Search tab contains a number of advanced search features among these are the ability to quickly select and run previous searches the ability to search topic titles only as well as the ability to display search results ranked according to presumed relevance Links in Help Topics The actual content of each help topic is displayed in the right pane of the help window Help topic texts may contain various types of links notably so called expanding drop down links Clicking an expanding drop down link will display detailed information The detailed information will be displayed immediately below the link itself the content on the page simply expands Expanding drop down links thus help save space 10 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Welcome If you wish to quickly collapse all texts from expanding drop down links in a help topic simply click the title of the topic on the help system s C
251. nt 4 Specify your User Name and Company Name bet nadir teed ara E T mlmm Demo Ml A Pa o va phy PA a maini Er mph mar hr l lepre mn unm bn ees Lal asn Di la ma it You furthermore have the option of selecting whether the NetMatrix Monitor application should be available just for you or for anyone using the computer If in doubt select Anyone When ready click Next Follow the next few simple steps in the installation wizard until you are asked to select the setup type that best suits your needs imina bli d 3 hist E pp ve a al PR a ay O E A Pa e CATA A Ad A BE e hij bema rra n el le a bi ett Coun If you want a shortcut to the NetMatrix Monitor application placed on your desktop automatically keep Add shortcut to desktop selected If you want the NetMatrix Monitor application to run automatically each time the computer loads Windows keep Add NetMatrix Monitor to Startup group selected When ready click Next twice 6 Click Finish on the last step to complete the installation The way you access the configuration window for the NetMatrix Monitor application differs depending on whether you configure the NetMatrix Monitor application for the first time or you want to make changes to the configuration of a running NetMatrix Monitor application 202 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual NetMatrix Monitor First Time Configuration To configure the NetMatrix Monitor appl
252. ntegrate your NetDVMS surveillance system with a very wide range of external sources for example access control systems alarm systems etc Events based on the analysis of received TCP and or UDP packets are called generic events NetDVMS listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window default is port 1234 The Generic Events window lets you manage such events Gener Event E Dairede A ei Pi Darga Evm pi Gira Eri T Tira Er pi Direi Eri Y Add nea meri Edi nokta Heine ali to DE Access You access the Generic Events window by clicking the Generic Events button in the Administrator window 124 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Generic Events Window s Events List and Buttons The Generic Events window features a Defined events list in which defined TCP and or UDP based events are listed as well a number of buttons used when configuring the events Add new event Edit selected Remove selected Lets you define new events The type of event you are able to define is determined by what you have selected in the Defined events list When nothing is selected or you have selected the list s Generic item clicking the Add new event button will open the Add New Event window for specifying generic events in which you are able to specify the rules and notification settings for individual TCP and or UDP base
253. ntral Settings window click the Settings button in the NetCentral Settings section of the General Settings window Specify login settings for the NetCentral server in the following fields e Login Type the name of the NetDVMS server The name must match the name specified on the NetCentral server itself Default name is Name e Password Type the password used for accessing the NetDVMS server The password must match the password specified on the NetCentral server itself Default password is Pass e Port Type the port number to which the NetCentral server should connect when accessing the NetDVMS server The port number must match the port number specified on the NetCentral server itself Default port is 1237 e IP When the NetCentral server retrieves alarms from the NetDVMS server the NetDVMS server includes information about its IP address in the alarm information If the NetCentral server accesses the NetDVMS server over the internet or if the NetDVMS server has two or more network adapters you must specify the IP address to which the NetCentral server should connect If you do not specify an IP address the IP address of the first network adaptor found the NetDVMS server will be used E Mail Setup Window The E Mail setup window lets you enable and configure the use of e mail alerts Such e mail alerts can automatically be sent to one or more recipients when motion is detected or specific events see About Input Events amp Ou
254. nual Input Events amp Output Add a Motion Triggered Output 8 When ready click the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window s Exit button to return to the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 9 Inthe Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click OK to return to the Administrator window 10 Close the Administrator The defined output will now be available in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS as described in the beginning of this text Note that individual users rights may prevent them from accessing specific cameras and or output in NetGuard and NetGuard EVS such rights are defined through the mage Server Administrator window How to Add a Motion Triggered Output Output e g lights sirens etc connected to cameras or other devices can be triggered automatically when motion is detected by a camera The output does not necessarily have to be physically connected to the motion detecting camera To add a motion triggered output do the following Note The following describes one way of adding a motion triggered output namely through the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Alternatively motion triggered output may be based on VMD events or if a device has its own motion detection capabilities on input events Once such VMD or input events have been added they can be tied to output through the O Control window Note In the following it is assumed t
255. o If the selected device is a video encoder several cameras may be attached to the device and a separate dialog will prompt you to select the required camera 144 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output a Fi A ir Carcel When ready click OK 3 In the I O Setup window your newly defined VMD event will now be listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the device to see the listing PO iip bl eee fa eer eee dd rsa OU ren al Click OK to close the I O Setup window and return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the VMD event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS Chip For video encoder devices you are able to define a VMD event for each connected camera simply repeat above process How to Add a Generic Event NetDVMS is able to analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and automatically trigger an event when specified criteria are met This way you are able to easily integrate your NetDVMS surveillance system with a very wide range of external sources for example access control systems alarm systems etc Events based on the analysis of received TCP and or UDP packets are called generic events NetDVMS listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window default is port 1234 To add a generi
256. o specify an event button first determine whether you want the event button to be available globally or for a particular camera only Specifying Global Event Buttons To specify a global event button select the Global entry at the top of the Defined Events list then click the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window for adding event buttons in which you specify a name for the event button as well as whether the event button should trigger any e mail or SMS alerts when clicked When you click OK in the Add New Event window for adding event buttons your are returned to the Event Buttons window in which your new event button will appear in the Defined Events list 120 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Specifying Camera Specific Event Buttons To specify an event button for a specific camera select the required camera in the Defined Events list then click the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window for adding event buttons in which you specify a name for the event button as well as whether the event button should trigger any e mail or SMS alerts when clicked When you click OK in the Add New Event window for adding event buttons you are returned to the Events window for specifying event buttons in which your new event button will appear in the Defined Events list Specifying Timer Events When you have specifi
257. occurs Grip TCP and UDP packages used for generic events may contain special characters such as O a etc within the text string to be analyzed en fret E Se a rel ee Pida r ees P arr Li Dra Bl ted dl FO ee A Lara hoe Pani nie bee z a Deer prue E TE PD l rA ETT i vere e rr El or fear aa PL Lier dd Tay Al relay The Edit Event window for editing generic events JAccess You access the Edit Event window for specifying generic events from the Generic Events window by selecting an event from the list then clicking the Edit selected button The Edit Event window for editing generic events is divided into three sections 131 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output General Event Settings Section The Edit Event window for editing generic events contains the following fields in the General Event settings section Event Name Event Protocol Event rule type Event priority Lest you edit the name of the event Each event must have a unique name Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt R ENA ae Lets you select which protocol NetDVMS should listen for in order to detect the event e Any Listen for packages using TCP as well as UDP protocol e TCP Listen for packages using TCP protocol only e UDP Listen for packages using UDP protocol only which port is used NetDVMS listens for generic
258. ocess When the recording server is restarted upon such database resizing the original database sizes will be used You should therefore make Sure the drive size problem is solved or adjust camera database sizes to reflect the altered drive size Tip Should the database resizing procedure take place you will be informed on screen in the NetGuard EVS in log files and if set up through an e mail and or SMS alert Backing Up Archives Many organizations want to back up recordings from cameras using tape drives or similar Creating such backups based on the content of camera databases is not recommended it may cause sharing violations or other malfunctions Instead create such backups based on the content of archives If you have not specified separate archiving locations for separate cameras you could simply back up the default local archiving directory Archives When scheduling a backup make sure the backup job does not overlap with your specified archiving times 68 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Viewing Archived Recordings You view archived recordings in the Viewer or NetGuard EVS This way you are able to use all of Viewer s or NetGuard EVS s advanced features video browsing smart search evidence export etc for archived recordings as well Archives Stored Locally or on Network Drives For archived recordings stored locally or on network drives you simply u
259. og files see About Logging Accessing the Built in Help System To view the built in help system do the following 1 Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon 2 Inthe menu that appears select Help For more information see Using the Built in Help System Viewing Information about NetDVMS To view information about your NetDVMS version do the following 1 Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon 2 Inthe menu that appears select About Knowing the version number can be useful in case you require support from your vendor 165 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Exiting the Recording Server Manager To exit the Recording Server Manager do the following L Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon 2 In the menu that appears select Exit Recording Server Manager Grip To re open the Recording Server Manager go to Windows Start menu and select All Programs gt Startup gt NetDVMS Recording Server Manager The Service Manager window lets you pause resume the Recording Server service Pausing the service is necessary in order to access some features such as configuration of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Access You access the Service Manager window by clicking the Service Manager button in the Administrator window Pausing the Recording Server Service To pause the Recording Server service click the Pause button
260. om a list on the client s Live tab The output does not necessarily have to be physically connected to the specific camera from which a NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite NetGuard EVS user views live video the output can be connected to any device on your NetDVMS system To add an output for manual control do the following Note In the following it is assumed that the required output unit has been connected to the output port on the required camera or other device but that it has not yet been defined on your NetDVMS system If you have already defined the output on your system begin at step 5 1 Inthe Administrator window click the I O Setup button This will open the I O Setup window 230 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual 2 4 How to In the I O Setup window first select the camera or other device to which the output unit is connected then click the Add new output event button 1 0 Setup Defined events e AXIS 221 Executive Office Cam Reception Add new event Add new output event Add YMD Event Motion Detection Advanced This will open the Add New Output window In the Add New Output window the External output connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Now specify information in the following fields e Output connected on Select the camera device output port on which the
261. om right corner of your screen CUIDADO DA 105 Example only your notification area may have different content Right clicking the notification area s NetMatrix icon lets you access a shortcut menu Show Window Config Exit From the menu select Exit Note that before the application closes you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor A shut down NetMatrix Monitor application can be started again by double clicking the NetMatrix Monitor shortcut on your desktop 212 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Device Drivers Logging Various types of log files can be generated by NetDVMS Log File Types Locations and Names NetDVMS is able to generate the following types of log files Administrator Application Log Files These files log activity in the Administrator application A log file is created for each day the Administrator is used Administrator log files are by default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software Note however that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the Genera Settings window s Logfile Settings section Administrator log files are named according to the structure AdminYYYYMMDD log e g Admin20070615 log Recording Server Service Log Files These files log activity in the recording server when it runs as the Recording Server service A log file is created for each day th
262. on and paste it to all cameras in one go 172 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients Video Clients Users can access a NetDVMS surveillance system in different ways e With NetGuard run straight from server good selection of standard features Example of NetGuard e With NetGuard EVS installed locally very feature rich based on the NET platform and thus highly flexible for future integration of plugins etc e With Ocularis Client Lite installed locally very feature rich based on the NET platform and thus highly flexible for future integration of plugins etc i EE nF w Y I i m A la a E LAJ x D E l all la EA SEA CREER Example of Ocularis Client Lite e With NetPDA NetCell Client installed on a handheld computer device with a wireless connection 173 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients Example of NetPDA NetCell Client The way remote access is handled at the surveillance system server end is different depending on remote access method Server End Providing Access through Clients Surveillance system administrators use two administration tools for providing access through NetGuard NetGuard EVS and Ocularis Client Lite Image Server Recordings viewed by NetGuard NetGuard EVS and Ocularis Client Lite users are provided by the NetDVMS surveillance system s Image Server The Image Server runs a
263. ononononnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnss 86 Specifying Image and Interval ODOM S vcd rei 87 Testing Your E Mail Alert COmig uration EE EA 87 IMAGE SERVER ADMINISTRATION cccceesceeeeeeesenseceseeenssenseoeeeseneees 88 Denver GOMIgut avon eclesial o adi 88 User ARIAS Tato ECU Na o tte 90 Master Slave Se up Se COTM as 91 Gontiquraton onthe Master Sen CP crisis aN a Eo eee 91 Configuration ona Slave Server id io 91 Not Using a Master Sie SUD s 92 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Welcome Upgrading Servers in an Existing Master Slave Se tup cccccccccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeegs 92 OG FIGS SCCHO IM xtc icin croseasrarecvntcdinsensativnanetannadn cts sataubunacaceshenalenencetuncewenteencoamemncamierenctencherdenatsa iaueesacitartercimnenncenercosmeas 92 AULA tace Traut ee asa Gag scant eau ane aie eet eee et 93 Language Support and XML Encoding Section ccccccccncncococncncnnnnenononenonnnononononnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenens 93 Good to know Client Access to Live Video from Stopped Cameras occcccccccccccononononcnccnnnncncnnnnnnnnnnancnncnnnnnncnnnnnenennnes 93 MeO Gal UE FANG SS sas 94 has Fe We OVE ko A RE ee ee ei ee eer eee eee er ete eee ee Ree ence ee eee eee eer ete ee erate eee eeree ee 94 TERA O E Se cece cee acre eee amen see ead aa seen meee eee 95 Whats Achive Directoy assis te Oe tae e o 96 Howto A
264. ontents tab Printing Help Topics To print a help topic navigate to the required topic and click the help window s Print button When you click the Print button a dialog box may ask you whether you wish to print the selected topic only or all topics under the selected heading When this is the case select Print the selected topic and click OK Grip When printing a selected help topic the topic will be printed as you see it on your screen Therefore if a topic contains expanding drop down links see Links in Help Topics above click each required drop down link to display the text in order for it to be included in your printout This allows you to create targeted printouts containing exactly the amount of information you require 11 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual System Requirements System Requirements The following are minimum system requirements for running NetDVMS and associated applications NetDVMS Surveillance System Server Operating System CPU RAM Network Hard Disk Type Hard Disk Space Software Microsoft Windows 2008 Server 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Server 2003 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Business 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit Windows XP Professional 32 bit or 64 bit Intel Pentium 4 2 4 GHz or higher Core 2 recommended Minimum 1 GB 2 GB or more recommended Eth
265. or Remove Programs This will open the Add or Remove Programs window 2 Inthe Add or Remove Programs window select the Video Device Pack Vx x entry where x x indicates the relevant version number and click the Remove button 3 You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the Video Device Drivers Click OK to remove the Video Device Drivers Installing New Version of Video Device Drivers To begin installation of the new Video Device Drivers version do the following 1 On the NetDVMS server s on which you want to install the new Video Device Drivers version shut down any running surveillance software including any running Recording Server service 2 Double click the downloaded Video Device Driver file Devicelnstaller exe to begin installation Note Depending on your security settings one or more Windows security warnings may appear after you click the link If such security warnings appear accept security warnings by clicking Run or similar exact button text depends on your browser version 3 Select required language and click OK This will open the Video Device Driver SetupWizard which will guide you through the installation 4 On the wizard s first step click the Next button 216 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Device Drivers 5 On the wizard s second step an installation path is automatically suggested Simply click Next to continue 6 On the wizard s third step
266. or individual cameras are specified in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window You are able to specify whether cameras should be online within specific periods of time or whether they should start and stop transferring video when specific events occur within specific periods of time You are also able to specify when the camera should speedup recording and if e mail alerts or SMS alerts should be triggered if motion is detected during specific periods of time If using PTZ cameras with patrolling you are furthermore able to specify if certain patrol schemes should be used during specific periods of time By default cameras added to NetDVMS will automatically be online and you will only need to modify the Camera Alert Scheduler window s settings if you require cameras to be online only at specific times or events or if you want to use specific alerts or PTZ patrol schemes Note however that this default may be changed by clearing the General Settings window s Create Default schedule for new cameras check box If the check box is cleared subsequently added cameras will not automatically be online in which case online schedules must be specified manually lt JAccess To access the Camera Alert Scheduler window click the Scheduler button in the Administrator window saver al ret hecha E3 To mh ate ee Fa kere eee L fe a e i qed hr rr 1 Diari Pal tomers e mo tion cd iru pede O A DED de Para ol e dey bo po Pl
267. order for it to be included in your printout This allows you to create targeted printouts containing exactly the amount of information you require Image Server The Image Server Administrator s Slave Administration window lets you define all servers required to run as Slave servers under the NetDVMS server you are configuring Remember that only one server can be the master server Any number of servers can be defined as Slave servers under the master server Slave deninintration ku Citar Sls l Heraa Fia Leiji al Lipke Loro 257 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to JAccess You access the Slave Administration window by clicking the Slaves button in the mage Server Administrator window Adding a Slave Server To add a slave server click the Slave Administration window s Add Slave button specify the host name of the slave server specify the required port number and click OK This will add the slave server to the Slave Administration window s list of slave servers Grip Instead of specifying a host name when adding a slave server you may specify the IP address of the slave server Simply type the IP address in the Hostname field when adding the slave server Remember that if on a local network the local IP address of the slave server must be used Before you start using your master slave setup remember to verify that e Required users have be defined on the master server
268. ore a fully used four port video encoder will use four licenses System administrators obtain DLKs as part of the software registration process You are able to specify each DLK manually when adding a device through the Device Setup Wizard available by clicking the Add Device button in the Administrator window However you can avoid having to specify each DLK manually by using the following procedure to import all received DLKs into NetDVMS in one go Prerequisites The DLKs received in a dlk file must have been saved at a location accessible by the surveillance server for example on a network drive or on a USB stick 1 Open the Administrator window 2 Inthe Administrator window click the Import DLKs button 3 Browse to the location at which you have saved the received dlk file Select the file and click Open All DLKs are now automatically imported and the relevant DLK will automatically appear when you add a device through the Device Setup Wizard How To Add A Device In NetDVMS you add devices IP video camera devices IP video encoder devices or digital video recorder DVR devices rather than actual cameras This is because devices have their own IP addresses or host names Being IP based NetDVMS primarily identifies units on the surveillance system based on their IP addresses or host names Even though each device has its own IP address or host name several cameras can be attached to a single device and thus sha
269. ore particular outputs This way you are able to define that when a selected event occurs or when a particular event button is clicked one or more selected outputs will be triggered Note Use of features in the I O Control window requires that events and outputs have been specified see About Input Events amp Output LEB T med r E Laa r dias Dira i o ees Petes ees ee z k a k a g E The I O Control window JAccess You access the I O Control window from the Administrator window by clicking the I O Control button Associating Events with Particular Outputs When associating an event with one or more outputs you are able to select between all outputs defined on the NetDVMS system you are not limited to selecting outputs defined on a particular device To associate a particular event with a particular output do the following e Select the required event in the Available Events list in the left side of the I O Control window Grip Events as well as event buttons may be listed Ortip When you select an event or event button in the Available Events list you can view detailed information about the selected event or event button under Event Information in the lower part of the window e Select the required output in the list of available outputs the list in the middle of the window e Click the gt gt button located below the Selected Outputs list This will copy the selected output to the Selected Outp
270. ou can however easily make more features and or languages available as required See Making New Features Available in the following for more information Making New Features Available Making new features including new language versions available to your organization s users involves two procedures First you install the required features on the surveillance system server You then use the Download Manager to fine tune which features should be available in the various language versions of the welcome page Installing New Features on Server If the Download Manager is open close it before installing new features on the server Installation files for NetGuard EVS language versions language packs etc are by default available on your surveillance system server in a folder called Installers The Installers folder is located in the NetDVMS installation folder To install a feature from the Installers folder select the required language sub folder then double click the required installation exe file Grip You can find more language versions of the NetGuard EVS installer and additional language packs on the NetDVMS software DVD When a new feature has been installed on the surveillance system server you will see a confirmation dialog If required you can open the Download Manager from the dialog 79 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Making New Features Available through
271. output unit is connected Many cameras devices only have a single output port in that case simply select Output 1 e Keep output for Specify the amount of time for which the output should be active when triggered in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information e External output name Specify a name for the output The name will appear on the button list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output Note that output names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp In the following example we have specified that a siren connected on a camera s Output 1 port should sound for five seconds when triggered Add Hirer Ona put E Ester output correciod lo SL Output conmected om Dupa i Kem cut hor 170 scored Secor a crea Grip You are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window In the I O Setup window your newly defined output is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing 231 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to SS A E Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administr
272. oving archives is not possible NetDVMS will attempt to delete the oldest archives This will happen if o there is less than 10 disk space left and the available disk space goes below 30 GB plus 1 5 GB per camera OF o the available disk space goes below 150 MB plus 20 MB per camera example with ten cameras the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space went below 350 MB 150 MB plus 20 MB for each of the ten cameras The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running out of disk space just because they have less than 10 disk space left IMPORTANT You will lose data from the archives being deleted 3 Ultimately if there are no archives to delete NetDVMS will attempt to resize camera databases by deleting their oldest recordings This will happen if o there is less than 5 disk space left and the available disk space goes below 20 GB plus 1 GB per camera OF o the available disk space goes below 75 MB plus 10 MB per camera example with ten cameras the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space went below 175 MB 75 MB plus 10 MB for each of the ten cameras The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running out of disk space just because they have less than 5 disk space left IMPORTANT You will lose the data deleted as part of the database resizing pr
273. ows User name Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication Remember that user names are case sensitive so make it clear to the users if any parts of their user names should specifically be upper or lower case Password Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication If using basic authentication users should enter their passwords exactly as you have specified them on the Image Server NetGuard EVS or Ocularis Client Lite Users When users log in to NetGuard EVS or Ocularis Client Lite they must select between using basic or Windows based authentication Provide them with the following information Server Address P address or hostname of the Image Server plus any port number required In NetGuard EVS s login dialog users will enter this information in a single field called Server Address so if the IP address is 123 123 123 123 and the port number is 80 tell users that the Server Address is 123 123 123 123 80 Authentication In the login dialog users will be asked to select between basic authentication or Windows based authentication Windows based authentication may in turn be based on the currently logged in Windows user o If using basic user name and password authentication tell users that the required authentication is Basic authentication o If using Windows based authentication based on the currently logged in Windows user tell users that the required authentication is W
274. p irae cee a dd Par dr di a Core ee neta Casa a i ss areca peas uf Copan baik Pit whee Cope ated Pate La A Beda E mi atin Lice whee Paid he ees up rd Vina PASTA nar o a dc Esa un Mart arar o re Ip hee l Eni e ol bejme D Can started Drain mages E Lo i eter econ a dire boa ed reia B 948 Cleat sent en motion ll detected M torrente A Che geen piai phen 167 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Fields and Check Boxes The Camera Alert Scheduler Window features the following fields and check boxes Box Camera Mode Online Speedup E mail SMS Patrolling Lets you select a particular camera for which to specify or view a schedule in the window s calendar section Note Always verify that you have selected the required camera in the list even though schedules displayed in the calendar section may look and indeed sometimes be similar the displayed schedule refers specifically to the selected camera Select whether to add or delete periods in the calendar section e Set Add periods May also be used to overwrite existing periods e Clear Delete existing periods Check the Online box when you want to set or clear online periods for the selected camera Check the Speedup box when you want to set or clear when the camera should always never speedup recording Note The Speedup check box is only available if you have enabled speedup in
275. password in the Administrator Login window in order to get access to the restricted features Ardewinintr ater Login We Pept peed Pe obra et Dll The Administrator Login window You will only be asked to specify the administrator password when you open the Administrator application by selecting it from Windows Start menu or by clicking the Administrator shortcut on the desktop This will only be the case when access to the Administrator application has been password protected Administrator Window The Administrator window the main window in the Administrator application is used by the surveillance system administrator for configuring NetDVMS upon installation or whenever configuration adjustments are required e g when adding new cameras to the system JAccess You access the Administrator application by selecting it from Window s Start menu or by clicking the Administrator desktop shortcut Access to the Administrator application may be password protected in which case you will be asked to provide the administrator password in the Administrator Login window IMPORTANT Changes you make in the Administrator application are not applied on your surveillance system until you exit the Administrator application This allows you to try out various settings before making them take effect The Administrator window s Device Manager section provides an overview of devices on your surveillance system the window s buttons let you con
276. pe the Device License Key DLK for the device in the DLK field 30 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Device Setup Wizard EJ Tka sfere haz Pard de bolo ede device or Pa enie Paden Video Dirrica Type HAL Addons 54H ETS 210047110 DMI Piee vines the Dic Laci ity EALE hav thot MAE aii Pista ia ty hp Feda Region nd Petree of AE es cel e dio Lor mete inte DU j ETS Specifying DLK for the device Grip If you have imported DLKs see How to Import Device License Keys the DLK field will already be filled with the DLK for the device Click Next 6 Assign a unique and descriptive name to the device Upon completion of the wizard the name will be used when listing devices and associated cameras in the Administrator window s Device Manager section The name may for example refer to the physical location of the camera s attached to the device Devica tarup Wird EJ Pene min anama frat haki per da Pa re do deca m e ira Bes ihe Rares bi tht e ee Pepi deje Dki a Canmi Setas buon Eo el up came raras md TZ dera Pee hn dere Cars Sa ack Freh Caracuel Assigning a name to the device Ortip You may click the Camera Setup button to access the Camera Settings for window in which you are able to specify certain settings related to camera name and PTZ control The latter requires that the camera Is a PTZ Pan tilt Zoom camera 7 Click Finish
277. pears on your screen during installation simply click its OK button The window simply provides a summary of your installation When installation is complete you can begin configuring your NetDVMS solution Double click the Administrator desktop shortcut or select Start gt All Programs gt NetDVMS gt Administrator to open the Administrator window Grip If you want to make additional language versions of Ocularis Client Lite NetGuard EVS and NetGuard such as Spanish French or Japanese versions available to your organization s users you can quickly do this once you have installed NetDVMS See more in the description of the Download Manager Upgrading Upgrading NetDVMS is an easy task and you need not worry about spending hours reconfiguring your software The following information applies if upgrading from one NetDVMS version to another as well as if upgrading to NetDVMS from a lower product in the product portfolio Prerequisites e Take note of your SLC Software License Code The SLC will change when the software version number changes e If your SLC has changed so have your DLKs Device License Keys Contact your NetDVMS vendor to get new DLKs You will typically receive the new DLKs in a single dIk file save it on the computer running the NetDVMS server e f you do not already have the new NetDVMS version contact your NetDVMS vendor to get he most current version which you are allowed to install with your SLC
278. perties of an existing one Type a name for the NetMatrix recipient The name will appear in various day to day usage situations it is therefore a good idea to use a descriptive and unambiguous name Note NetMatrix recipient names must not contain the following characters lt gt Y Address Used when adding a new NetMatrix recipient or editing the properties of an existing one Specify the IP address of the NetMatrix recipient Grip To jump to the next IP address segment in the field press SPACE on your keyboard Port Used when adding a new NetMatrix recipient or editing the properties of an existing one Specify the port number to be used when sending commands to the NetMatrix recipient The NetMatrix recipient will listen for commands on this port By default port 12345 is used You are of course able to specify another port number Password Used when adding a new NetMatrix recipient or editing the properties of an existing one 159 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Field Check Description Box Button Specify the password to be used when communicating with the NetMatrix recipient NetGuard NetMatrix triggered live video may also be displayed in NetDVMS EVS users Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS If Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS is used distribution of the NetMatrix triggered live video takes place slightly differently Select
279. put does not necessarily have to be physically connected to the motion detecting camera To add a motion triggered output do the following 233 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to Note The following describes one way of adding a motion triggered output namely through the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Alternatively motion triggered output may be based on VMD events or if a device has its own motion detection capabilities on input events Once such VMD or input events have been added they can be tied to output through the O Control window Note In the following it is assumed that the required output unit has been connected to the output port on the required camera or other device but that it has not yet been defined on your NetDVMS system If you have already defined the output on your system begin at step 5 1 Inthe Administrator window click the I O Setup button This will open the I O Setup window 2 Inthe I O Setup window first select the camera or other device to which the output unit is connected then click the Add new output event button 1 0 Setup Defined events e AXIS 221 Executive Office Cam 1 Reception Add new event Add new output event Add YMD Event Motion Detection Advanced This will open the Add New Output window 3 Inthe Add New Output window the Exte
280. r when NetGuard NetGuard EVS or Ocularis Client Lite on a local network connects to a surveillance system which is also on the local network the Image Server may if different subnets are involved not recognize the client s IP address as being local When this is the case the Image Server may not return a suitable IP address to the OnSSI client for further communication between the two Therefore you are able to define a list of IP ranges which the Image Server should recognize as coming from a local network in which case it will respond with a suitable IP address and seamless communication will be possible 89 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Field Button Description Max number of You are able to limit the number of access clients allowed to connect clients at the same time Depending on your NetDVMS configuration and the performance of the hardware and network used limiting the number of simultaneously connected clients may help reduce server load If more than the allowed number of simultaneously connected access clients attempt to log in only the allowed number of access clients will be allowed access Any access clients in excess of the allowed number will receive an error message when attempting to log in By default a maximum of ten simultaneously connected access clients are allowed To specify a different maximum number of access clients allowed to connec
281. r the event button event name Note Event button names must not contain the following characters lt gt Y Send e mail Select check box to send an e mail alert when the event button is if this event clicked occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is image from selected 122 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output camera Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event button is clicked in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Send SMS if Select check box to send an SMS alert when the event button is this event clicked occurs Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window Edit Event Window The Edit Event window for editing event buttons lets you edit the settings for an existing event button Fain Event E Lore a E m s rari sare Se ee ma Pr Tend coal F ha eet cart IH uirga Ded SRP d Pa eee a JAccess You access the Edit Event window for editing event buttons from the Event Buttons window by first selecting the required event button in the Defined Events list then clicking the Edit selected button Edit Event Window s Fields The Edit
282. ra list page tap the Return icon E The Return icon is only available when using regular view Logging Out of the NetPDA NetCell Client Before closing your PDA you must log out of the NetPDA NetCell Client You log out by tapping the Logout icon on the camera list page Ey 199 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Viewer Viewer The Viewer is a standalone application which lets you browse and play back video recordings The Viewer also lets you print still images send still images via e mail and export entire video and audio sequences in a variety of formats The Viewer can be accessed in two ways e If you work on the surveillance system server On the surveillance system server the Viewer is automatically installed as part of the NetDVMS installation You access the Viewer from Windows Start menu Select Start gt All Programs gt NetDVMS gt Viewer e By people who have received video evidence material from your surveillance system This type of users are typically police officers internal or external investigators or similar When NetGuard EVS operators export video evidence they are able to include the Viewer with the exported evidence This is a great advantage for the recipient of the exported evidence since no installation is required in order to use the Viewer for browsing exported evidence Where can find more information about the Viewer The Viewer has its own built in help system Alt
283. rator application is enabled To enable the required setting open the Administrator application and do the following 1 In the Administrator window click the General Settings button This will open the Genera Settings window 2 In the General Settings window s Advanced section select Start cameras on remote live requests 3 Click OK 93 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Local IP Ranges The Define local IP ranges window lets you define IP address ranges which the Image Server should recognize as coming from a local network Define local IP ranges Eg SS gt ri VA Add O Dee Ranga ett PE Clore Access You access the Define local IP ranges window by clicking the Local IP Ranges button in the Image Server Administrator window To define a local IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window do the following 1 Specify the beginning of the IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window s first field and the end of the IP address range in the second field 2 Click the Add button The IP address range will be added to the list in the lower part of the Define local IP ranges window You may define as many local IP address ranges as required If required an IP address range may include only one IP address example 192 168 10 1 192 168 10 1 3 When ready click the Define local IP ranges window s Close button to return to the Image
284. rd EVS link Grip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software or similar exact wording depends on your browser version When this is the case accept the security warnings by clicking Run or similar exact button names depend on your browser version 3 When the installation wizard starts click Next to continue the installation and follow the steps in the installation wizard For surveillance system administrators it is possible to deploy NetGuard EVS to users computers using tools such as Microsoft Systems Management Server SMS Such tools let administrators build up databases of hardware and software on local networks The databases can then among other things be used for distributing and installing software applications such as NetGuard EVS over local networks 1 Locate the self extracting NetGuard EVS installation exe file You find the file in a subfolder under the folder httpdocs The httpdocs folder is located under the folder in which your surveillance software is installed 178 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients Example of a relevant subfolder under the httpdocs folder httpdocs NetGuard EVS Installers 3 5b English en US 2 With an extraction tool such as WinZip or similar extract the files contained in the installation file to a folder of your choice
285. rd Remote Client 6 9 4 5e Download Manager screen 78 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Download Manager s Tree Structure Explained e The first level of the tree structure simply indicates that you are working with NetDVMS e The second level refers to the languages in which the page is available In the example the page is available in English French Chinese and Spanish e The third level refers to the features which are or can be made available to users In the example these features are limited to NetGuard EVS and NetGuard e The fourth level refers to particular versions of each feature such as version 4 5e which are or can be made available to users e The fifth level refers to the language versions of the features which are or can be made available to users In the example only English versions are initially listed This is because the example is from an English version of NetDVMS had you installed a Japanese version only Japanese versions would initially be listed In the example NetDVMS has been installed an English language version The fact that only standard features are initially available and only in the same language version as the surveillance system itself helps reduce installation time and save space on the server There is simply no need to have a feature or language version available on the server if nobody is going to use it Y
286. re the same IP address or host name This is typically the case with cameras attached to video encoder devices or DVR devices You can of course configure and use each camera individually even when several cameras are attached to a single device In addition to camera devices video encoder devices and DVR devices it is possible to add a number of dedicated I O input output devices to NetDVMS When such I O devices are added they can be used in events based system setup in the same way as a camera For more information about using I O devices see Using Dedicated I O Devices For information about which I O devices are supported refer to the release note Once a device is added in NetDVMS any cameras attached to the device are automatically recognized by the software and listed in the Administrator window s Device Manager section 29 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Cece Manage a Back Dow 101065 3 Ta Correa 1 oe Meeting Room 10 10 5010 Ta Canes 1 a Camera 2 Ta Camera 3 Ta Cameo d Detail from the Administrator window s Device Manager section two devices have been added the first device has a single camera attached whereas the second device has four cameras attached To add a device use the following procedure Prerequisites You must have configured IP address password etc on the device itself as described by the manufacturer L 2 4 Op
287. reset positions on the camera video encoder itself 1 First use the controls in the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window s PTZ View section to move the PTZ camera to the required position 2 Having moved the PTZ camera to the required position select an undefined item may be labeled Undefined or with a position number in the Preset Positions section s list of preset position names and click the Set Position button to define a name for the preset position For detailed information about the functionality of PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window such as the ability to test your preset positions the ability to combine preset positions with events or the ability to use preset positions in PTZ patrolling schemes see Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window s sections in the following You are able to define up to 50 preset positions 56 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name Window s Sections Each of the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window s sections are described in the following PTZ View Section The PTZ View section lets you control the PTZ camera and watch the PTZ camera s movements You use this section to move the PTZ camera to the positions you then define as presets positions in the Preset Positions section To move the PTZ camera s
288. revious size when a connect command Is received e On Connect Lets you determine how the NetMatrix Monitor window should react when a connect command Is received O Show Alert If selected this setting will show a small alert box in the bottom right corner of your screen when a connect command is received The alert box will close automatically after 10 seconds Show Window If selected this setting will automatically restore a NetMatrix Monitor window in hidden mode to previous size when a connect command is received e On Disconnect Lets you determine how the NetMatrix Monitor window should react when a disconnect command is received O Show Alert If selected this setting will show a small alert box in the bottom right corner of your screen when a disconnect command is received The alert box will close automatically after 10 seconds Hide Window If selected this setting will automatically send the NetMatrix Monitor window to hidden mode when a disconnect command is received When the window is in hidden mode you still be able to access it by clicking the NetMatrix icon in Windows notification area also known as the system tray When ready click OK 206 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual NetMatrix Monitor Changing the Configuration of a Running NetMatrix Monitor To change the configuration of a running NetMatrix Monitor do the following 1 Open the NetMatrix Monitor window Right
289. right to log in with a access client it will not remove the user s data from Active Directory What Information to Provide to Users The information you need to provide in order to enable users to effortlessly log in to the surveillance system depends on whether the users are using NetGuard NetGuard EVS or Ocularis Client Lite For NetPDA NetCell Client users see Using the NetPDA NetCell Client NetGuard Users When users log in with NetGuard they must select between using basic or Windows based authentication Provide them with the following information 98 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Address IP address or hostname of the Image Server Port Port to use when accessing the Image Server e g 80 Authentication In NetGuard s login dialog users will be asked to select between basic authentication or Windows based authentication Windows based authentication may in turn be based on the currently logged in Windows user o If using basic user name and password authentication tell users that the required authentication is called Basic o If using Windows based authentication based on the currently logged in Windows user tell users that the required authentication is called Windows current user o If using Windows based authentication which should not necessarily be based on the currently logged in Windows user tell users that the required authentication is called Wind
290. rity will be triggered In case a package matches the criteria for several events with an identical priority e g two events with a priority of 999 all events with the priority in question will be triggered Event Rule String Section The Edit Event window for editing generic events contains the following fields and buttons in the Event rule string section Field Description Button Event substring Event message include Lets you specify the individual items that NetDVMS should look out for when analyzing data packages Specify one or more terms then click the Add button to add the specified term s to the Event message include field the content of which will be used for the actual analysis Examples e Single term User001 when added to the Event message include field the term will appear as User001 e Several terms as one item User001 Door053 Sunday when added to the Event message include field the terms will appear as User001 Door053 Sunday When you add several terms as one item appearing as e g User001 Door053 Sunday in the Event message include field everything between the quotation marks must appear together in the package in the specified sequence If the terms must appear in the package but not necessarily in any exact sequence add the terms one by one i e so they will appear as User001 Door053 Sunday in the Event message include field Displays the string which
291. rmation in the following fields e Timer event name Specify a name for the timer event Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt Y e Timer event occurs after Specify the amount of time that should pass between the event occurring event button being clicked and the timer event in either seconds or minutes When ready click OK 3 Inthe window from which you opened the New Timer window your newly defined timer event will now be listed 150 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Deere Mariig al prerii al Dita l batt a E 75 Fortran ee Las L E Pecepierg Coen 1 ua Det Ban I A li E eel i BEEDLE mai a rides Server Loa 7 LE dai ra pr Cara dr pda eel enredo EA bare dad rae ari Lt pind NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Timer event in this example associated with a VMD event listed in I O Setup window You may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the required device as well as the required main event to see the timer event Timer event associated with an event button listed in Event Buttons window You may have to click the expand icon l in front of the name of the required device as well as the required main event to see the timer event Timer event associated with a generic event listed in Generic Events window You may have to click the expand icon in front of the word Generic
292. rnal output connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Now specify information in the following fields e Output connected on Select the camera device output port on which the output unit is connected Many cameras devices only have a single output port in that case simply select Output 1 e Keep output for Specify the amount of time for which the output should be active when triggered in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information e External output name Specify a name for the output The name will appear on the button list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output Note that output names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp In the following example we have specified that a siren connected on a camera s Output 1 port should sound for five seconds when triggered 234 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to hdd Hew Output E EJ aa Esterral cufpad correcto ls slat ugd corneciod on Dp i Ken aip ha E 10 acorn T Second Enteral cup marras See Tem ihana Esc Grip You are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup w
293. rs are Active Directory objects representing individuals with a user account Example 96 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output GROUPS Groups are Active Directory objects that can contain several users In this example the Management group contains three users Groups can contain any number of users By importing a group into NetDVMS you are able to import all of its members in one go The number of groups may vary from organization to organization depending on the structure and requirements of each organization Note that a user can be a member of more than one group For instance Adolfo Rodriguez from our fictitious example above could easily be a member of the organization s Management group as well as of its Sales group and its Staff Social Club group Each of the two methods is described in the following How to Add a New Basic User To define a new dedicated surveillance system user account with basic user name and password authentication click the User administration window s Add Basic User button specify required user name and password and click OK This will add the user to the User administration window s list of users In the list s Type column the user will appear as a Basic User A Basic user is furthermore indicated by a blue dot next to the user icon How to Add a New Windows User or Group Note This method only works for users who will access the surveilla
294. rst select a camera from which you are able to view video in a NetGuard NetGuard EVS then click the Settings button This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window In the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Event Notifications button 147 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output seis a falla lsi Has i 1 E TELE A LE Emn rer h eer pa F ja el a Reece eet eee ma ea ir Fe aie aire hers A pear pe hee pe rral e OL ere er A Inir seri Corp dar an e rep e r de ae dir EA pi es Pre Trma Herer diei mirr pers biror ae To seh prep Ari a ere Cote eones Calle ee r ME PEO PO AA Ha Deegan r al alar deta poe ote a a bd da e oii ad e Pe ilgi nica y daa ar id Hera echo a a y vei rara This will open the Setup Notifications on Events window 3 Inthe Setup Notifications on Events window s Available Events list expand the Generic item and select your generic event Then click the gt gt button to move the selected generic event to the Active Events list Telep Haili ation an Deere E Sea rada ad Piel A ami Cormeen Mibranora can E verdi Note Make sure that your generic event is the only event appearing in the Active Events list while you are performing the test otherwise you cannot be sure that it is your generic event which triggers the event notification Once you
295. rver Manager sjcva5 5 A aa 166 PAUSINI ihe Recording Server Service id 166 Resuming the Recording Server Service cccccccccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenenenenenenenegs 166 What to Do if the Recording Server Service iS Stopped ooooooooococococococononononnnono conocio norris 166 SCHEDULING ini A E E 167 Helds and OCNECK BOXES anina a A e dd od 168 Calendar Secon a a o a e a Bien EE E E T le EE EE A 170 How to Set or Clear Periods in the Calendar ccccccccccececececeaeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaasesseeeeeceeeeeeseseaueasaasgeseeseeeeeeeeaes 170 Sl AA A A EE ee 171 Camera Alerts Scheduler Window s Copy and Paste BUttONS cccccccccccccccncnononcnononcnnnnnnonononononnonononononnnonononnnnnos 172 VIDEO GLIEN T S usd 173 Server End Providing Access through Cs on Se A a 174 IMAGE SERVER at 174 DOWNLOAD MANAGERS aaa ao iaa 174 Server End Providing Access Through NetPDA NetCell Client occccccccccccnococonococonnnnnncononononancncnnnnnnnnnnonononnnnns 174 Assess Your Organization s NS id 175 WhaHS NETZ oosa r e o Ll td abd tance 175 Differences between NetGuard and NetGuard EVS cooooooocccconcnnnnnococonnnnnnncncnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnncrnnnnnnnonnnnnrnnnnrananennns 176 NETGUARD EV S A ai 177 STAN NUEVOS A odos 177 Removing NelGuardE VS A a de EE 177 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Welcome IVS Fal ATO Wicsesc ccaszsensescesasostoce
296. s The Image Server itself does not require separate hardware it runs as a service on the surveillance system server i e the computer running the NetDVMS software Surveillance system administrators use the Image Server Administrator window to manage the Image Server s settings Access You access the Image Server Administrator window from Windows Start menu Select Start gt All Programs gt NetDVMS gt Image Server Administrator Alternatively simply double click the Image Server Administrator desktop shortcut Each section of the Image Server Administrator window is described in the following lr pg A ge y ii a pd aa Server Configuration Section The Server Configuration section is used for specifying server name and port for enabling optional external access to the server for optional definition of IP address ranges which should be recognized as being local and for specifying a maximum number of remote users allowed to connect simultaneously The Server Configuration section contains the following fields and buttons Field Button Description Name Lets you specify a name for the server By default the name Is simply Server You can of course change the default name to a name of your choice NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users with rights to configure their clients will see the name of the server when they create views on their client s Setup tab 88 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual
297. s Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information e External output name Specify a name for the output The name will appear on the button list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output Note that output names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp In the following example we have specified that a siren connected on a camera s Output 1 port should sound for five seconds when triggered Add thew Output EJ Ezdira apu corraciad lo 101 Output comectedan Output i Rene culpa or iD ecri Secor ema culpo rara Lane Eep hai OR Carcel Grip You are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window 4 Inthe I O Setup window your newly defined output is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing il rr aid l a Es Aa Bn T b ueri tad emr ee ddd re OU ren dipj WAT A re tear el Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administrator window 5 Inthe Administrator window first select the camera for which the output should be available then click the Settings button 156 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 6
298. s a service on the NetDVMS server it does not require separate hardware The system administrator uses the mage Server Administrator window to manage NetGuard NetGuard EVS and Ocularis Client Lite access to the surveillance system Download Manager In order to get copy of NetGuard NetGuard EVS or Ocularis Client Lite users connect to the surveillance system server which will present them with a welcome page The welcome page will list the available clients and language versions The system administrator uses the Download Manager to control which clients and language versions Should be available to users on the welcome page Server End Providing Access Through NetPDA NetCell Client Use of the NetPDA NetCell Client requires that a matching NetPDA NetCell Server is installed on the surveillance system The NetPDA NetCell Server is installed on an Internet Information Services IIS server and is used as a front end to the NetDVMS system s Image Server on which user rights are defined The NetPDA NetCell Server handles login and session requests between the NetPDA NetCell Client and the Image Server The NetPDA NetCell Server also handles resizing of surveillance video to fit the screen layout of the NetPDA NetCell Client 174 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients For more information see Installing amp Configuring the NetPDA NetCell Server as well as the description of the Image Server
299. s no longer possible in current NetDVMS versions the HTTP Server and Realtime Feed Server have been discontinued Use the much Superior Ocularis Client Lite NetGuard EVS or NetGuard instead NetDVMS s Administrator window may appear on your screen during installation When this is the case the window will automatically close again after a short while In the most recent software version a Download Manager is introduced and you will have the option of opening the Download Manager during installation The Download Manager is used for managing which features your organization s users will be able to access from a targeted welcome page on the surveillance system server You can open the Download Manager if you like but you can just as easily make changes through the Download Manager once installation is completed 20 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Installation Restoring a Configuration Backup if Required If for some reason after installing the new software version you have lost your old configuration you can easily restore your configuration provided you have created a backup of your configuration prior to upgrading the software 1 2 3 Drag and drop the backed up configuration files and folders into the new installation directory When asked if you wish to overwrite the existing files click Yes Restart your server Updating Video Device Drivers Video drivers are small programs used
300. s not running start IIS by right clicking the Default Web Site item then selecting Start Then NetPDA NetCell Server Installation Having configured the IIS port number you are ready to begin installation of the NetPDA NetCell Server itself On the server insert the NetDVMS software DVD wait for a short while select required language then click the Install NetPDA NetCell Server link 187 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients Alternatively if you are installing a version downloaded from the internet run the NetPDA NetCell Server installation file PDAServerlnstaller_ required language exe from the location you have saved it to Grip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software When this Is the case click the Run button Read and accept the license agreement This will take you to the Image server setup step In the Hostname IP Address field specify the IP address or host name of the NetDVMS server to which the NetPDA NetCell Server should connect Grip If installing the NetPDA NetCell Server on the same server as the surveillance system itself simply specify Localhost Grip If the NetPDA NetCell Server should connect to a master slave system specify the IP address or host name of the master server In the Port field specify the port number used by the surveillance
301. s sica DO 252 What Does the Welcome Page Look Like ccc ooonnccnnccccocnnconcconocooconnncnnnnnconnnnnnonnnrcnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnonnranrnnnnnnnnanennns 253 UA AA ase aaa rs as ee acs Ci ea A alee 253 Default Configuration Of Download Manager ccccecceccceeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneneeeeeeeneeegs 253 Download Manager s Tree Structure Explained ooooononnoniccnnnnccccnccncnnancnccnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanananannns 254 Making New Features Av ail resol 255 Installing New Features On Serve n iacnnsenstannnnannirnnsinenon neninnn ann 255 Making New Features Available through the Download Manager ccccccseeseeeeeeeseeseseeeeeesuecseeeeeesuanseeeeseranees 255 ale laes lao Removing AA a sat a ads estan eee se O 255 MIS Scanning Into Malone eii 256 FIEL SYSTEM io 256 Navigating the Built in Help OSM ii 256 LAKS ROSA R 257 PANO HEID TOPICS inni nn N 257 IMAGE SERVER ii 257 Adding a Slave Severa 258 REMOVING a Slave SC Veni ENEE AAT Ni 258 SLC SOFTWARE LICENSE CODE nnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ZOO Legal Notice This product manual is intended for general information purposes only and due care has been taken in its preparation Any risk arising from the use of this information rests with the recipient and nothing herein should be construed as constituting any kind of warranty OnSSI reserves the right to make adjustmen
302. se the Viewer s or NetGuard EVS s browsing features for example the timeline browser or the playback controls for finding and viewing the required recordings just like you would with recordings stored in a camera s regular database Exported Archives For exported archives e g archives stored on a CD you must use the Viewer Click the browse button in the Viewer s Database Information control panel to browse for the archive you want to view Once you have specified the required archive this way you can use all of the Viewer s browsing features for navigating the recordings in the archive Virus Scanning and Archiving If allowed in your organization disable any virus scanning of camera databases and archiving locations For more information see Virus Scanning Information New Database if Archiving Fails Under extremely rare circumstances archiving may fail For example a database may be full and ready for archiving but the operating system may lock content in the database if a content file is open This would prevent archiving In practice this situation would only occur if somebody attempted to view a database file e g a pic file directly from the database folder at the time of the archiving viewing the file directly would not work since database content cannot be viewed as individual files only through a NetGuard EVS or Viewer In such situations the database will be put aside for archiving at a later point in time While th
303. selecting check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure you can quickly make the features available again 255 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to e You can remove features which have previously been made available through the Download Manager This will remove the installation of the features on the surveillance system server The features will disappear from the Download Manager but installation files for the features will be kept in the surveillance system server s Installers folder so you can re install them later if required e Inthe Download Manager click the Remove features button e Inthe Remove Features window select the features you want to remove e Click OK You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the selected features If you are sure click the Yes button e You can remove installation files for non required features from the surveillance system server This can help you save disk space on the server if you know that your organization is not going to use certain features typically non relevant language versions See Removing Installation files for End User Features for more information Virus Scanning Information If you are using virus scanning software on the NetDVMS server it is likely that the virus scanning will use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning data from the Download Manager If allowed in your organization disable virus scanning on
304. sensor connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Add New Deer ee eo ee ee Krmi Saran ere de ea ead E z Dyt on aR r wa k Eier ere rna EA He era E reer cet FY ae ord Se Ge eer coos DE Daca 140 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Now specify information in the following fields e Sensor connected through Select the camera device input port on which the input unit is connected Some cameras devices only have a single input port in that case simply select Input 1 e Event occurs when input goes Select whether the input event should be triggered when the signal on the input sensor rises High or falls Low e External event name Specify a name for the event Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt e Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send e mail if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window If requiring an image recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box e Optional If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs
305. server may be different In the resulting menu select Properties This will open the Default Web Site Properties dialog Select the dialog s ASP NET tab The NET Framework version in use will be indicated in the ASP NET version field 184 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual T Video Clients If required change the ASP NET version to 1 1 4322 Default Web Site Properties Ea Apli Subp HAF Filer Hara trm bay ita j Cepal Fee TE 1 Pp TETT de pda iy TTF Hoban 1 1 4322 Fie irea char OS IFAH Fir coat Fit A oo La oda Qu Ji pre gar Hao Example only other versions may be available on your server 8 9 Click OK Close the Internet Information Services and Administrative Tools windows if still open Allowing Use of NET Framework Windows 2003 Only When 1 Ze NET Framework is installed you must allow use of NET Framework by doing the following Click Start and select Control Panel Click Administrative Tools Click Internet Information Services In the Internet Information Services Manager s left pane select the Web Service Extensions item On the Extended tab in the Internet Information Services Manager s right pane select ASP NET v1 1 4322 and click the Allow button 185 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients D Internet Information Services 115 Manager E Uy Ble Action ew Windo
306. short while select required language then click the Install NetPDA NetCell Client link Alternatively if you are installing a version downloaded from the internet run the NetPDA NetCell Client installation file PDAClienti nstaller_ required language exe from the location you have saved it to rip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software When this is the case click the Run button e Read and accept the license agreement e Select the folder in which to install the NetPDA NetCell Client software on the PC e Click Next twice to begin the installation process e When installation is complete click the Close button After installing the NetPDA NetCell Client on the PC the ActiveSync program will display the Add Remove Programs dialog which lets you transfer and install the NetPDA NetCell Client on the PDA e Click Yes to install the NetPDA NetCell Client in the default location on the PDA Checking the Wireless Connection Before using the NetPDA NetCell Client verify that the wireless connection to the PDA is configured and working correctly You can quickly check the wireless connection by pinging the IP address of the PDA from a command prompt on the server on which the NetPDA NetCell Server is installed what is pinging Pinging is a quick way of determining whether an IP address is available you simply send
307. sible motion detection settings for each camera may help you later avoid unnecessary alerts etc Depending on the physical location of the camera it may be a very good idea to test motion detection settings under different physical conditions day night windy calm weather etc The Adjust Motion Detection window Access You access the Adjust Motion Detection window by clicking the Motion Detection button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Note Before you configure motion detection sensitivity for a camera it is highly recommended that you have configured the camera s image quality settings such as resolution compression etc in the Configure Device window and that you have specified any areas to be excluded from motion detection for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background in the Define Exclusion Regions window If you later change image quality settings and or exclusion area settings you should always test motion detection sensitivity settings afterwards The Adjust Motion Detection window features two sliders one for setting Noise Sensitivity and one for setting Motion Sensitivity Noise Sensitivity Noise is insignificant changes in individual pixels which should not be regarded as motion The Noise Sensitivity slider determines how much each pixel must change before it is regarded as motion Insignificant chang
308. slider rip You are also able to control playback by using the navigation buttons on the PDA itself Left button starts reverse playback right button starts forward playback center button stops playback and the up and down buttons take you to the next and previous sequence respectively If you are viewing the recorded video in the rotated full screen view playback control with the PDA s navigation buttons is automatically rotated to match the view 197 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients Finding Recordings from a Specific Time and Date If you know the exact data and time you want to view recorded video from tap the Go to icon ES This will display the Goto selected data time page dema O Goto selected date time Date EE Time masas OK A Cancel Specify the required date in the Date field and the required time hours minutes seconds in the Time fields then tap OK The playback view will now display an image recorded at the specified time If no recordings are available from the specified time the last image recorded before the specified time will be displayed Finding Recordings from a Specific Event By tapping the Alarms icon a you are able to view a list of recordings of detected events occasionally known as alarms for the selected camera C F eet ie 1 Camera 1 aE 11 24 EE 28 05 2004 09 44 36 2 mages 23 05 2004 11 30 02 2 images 2205 2004 11 30
309. ssage include field the last item in the field will be removed Notification Settings Section The Add New Event window for specifying generic events contains the following fields in the Notification settings section Send Email Select check box to send an e mail alert when the event occurs if this event occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert 130 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Field Description feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is image from selected camera Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Send SMS if Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs this event occurs Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window When you have specified a new generic event click OK Edit Event Window The Edit Event window for editing generic events lets you edit the settings for an event based on input from external sources using the TCP and UDP protocols You are able to edit the criteria according to which NetDVMS should analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and whether any notifications should be triggered when the event
310. st store the archive in the local default archiving directory then immediately move the archive to the archiving location you have specified While this may at first glance seem unnecessary it greatly speeds up the archiving procedure which will reduce delays in case of network problems Archiving directly to a network drive would mean that archiving time would vary depending on the available bandwidth on the network First storing the archive locally then moving it ensures that the archiving is always performed as fast as possible If archiving to a network drive note the regular camera database must still be stored on a local drive i e a drive attached directly to the computer running the NetDVMS system Archiving Audio If audio is enabled on a device audio from the device will also be archived If the device is a video encoder with several channels audio will be archived with the camera on channel 1 When an audio source is enabled audio is recorded to the associated camera s database This will affect the database s capacity for storing video It is thus important to bear in mind that the maximum limit of the database is likely to be reached earlier if recording audio and video than if only recording video It is thus a very good idea to use archiving if using audio sources You may also want to archive more frequently if recording audio and video than if only recording video Storage Capacity Required for Archiving The storage
311. stem To add an input based event do the following 1 Inthe Administrator window click the I O Setup button This will open the I O Setup window 2 In the I O Setup window first select the camera or other device to which the input unit is connected then click the Add new event button med dl rr ae een ASA A ia a re isha ml This will open the Add New Event window Note Some cameras devices are capable of handling one input event only others are capable of handling several input events The content of the Add New Event window varies accordingly For simplicity reasons the following steps will describe adding an event on a camera device capable of handling one input event only 242 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to 3 Inthe Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only the External sensor connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Add thew Deer ec Wo A lo Shami Sonne ees he Be ag i red Everton AR cl wa k T Lara PAET rE ETA Hera era E rapi cet FEY Er feed AS fe eed oot Now specify information in the following fields e Sensor connected through Select the camera device input port on which the input unit is connected Some cameras devices only have a single input port in that case simply select Input 1 e Event occurs when input goes Select whether the input event should be triggered when the si
312. system administrator it is highly recommended that you consult your system administrator before removing any surveillance system related software NetPDA NetCell Server Removal Procedure 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs 2 Inthe Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select NetPDA NetCell Server 3 Click the Remove button and follow the removal instructions NetPDA NetCell Client Removal Procedure The NetPDA NetCell Client may be removed in two ways either directly from the PDA or from a PC with ActiveSync Removing the NetPDA NetCell Client Directly from the PDA 1 Tap the PDA s Start button 2 Select Settings 3 Select the System tab 4 Select Remove Programs 224 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Removal 5 Select the NetPDA NetCell Client and tap the Remove button 6 Select Yes when asked if you want to remove the program Removing the NetPDA NetCell Client from a PC with ActiveSync Note This method requires that the NetPDA NetCell Client was installed on the PC and transferred to the PDA through ActiveSync 1 Connect the PDA to the PC on which ActiveSync and the NetPDA NetCell Client software is Installed 2 Use Windows Add or Remove Programs feature to remove the NetPDA NetCell Client software 3 When removing the NetPDA NetCell Client software from the PC this way ActiveSync will give
313. system s Image Server default IS port 80 then click Next An Important Note is displayed it is highly recommended that you read it When ready click Next This will take you to the Select Installation Address step In the Virtual directory field specify the virtual directory in which the NetPDA NetCell Server Should be installed on the IIS default virtual directory is NetPDA NetCell Server In the Port field specify the port number you used during IIS configuration default port number is 8080 Click Next twice When installation is completed click the Close button Verifying the NetPDA NetCell Server Installation Before you begin installing and using the NetPDA NetCell Client it is highly recommended that you verify that the NetPDA NetCell Server is installed correctly First make sure that the NetDVMS system s recording server service and Image Server service are running and that a user with access to relevant cameras has been set up in the Image Server Administrator Grip You can use a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS to verify that the Image Server s user setup works Then do the following Double click the PDAServer desktop shortcut created during the NetPDA NetCell Server installation 9 PE Ser This will open the NetPDA NetCell Server Administrator dialog 188 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients FOE Sarver Adentro Image Soror sottings Homar lta altares Por
314. t Eki Door E Wir a a Back Door West Wing Corera b Executive Office Cam Corera 1 In this example we have specified that when motion is detected on Camera b the selected NetMatrix recipient should connect to Camera b 2 ES Alam Condal Display Motion on Bk Doo Wed ng Camera b Hp Connect gt JBsck Doo tert Wing Comers bi 5 Repeat as required Bear in mind that you define events and actions for a single NetMatrix recipient at a time Monitor If you have used previous versions of NetDVMS you may note that the Monitor application for viewing of live video on the surveillance system server itself has been discontinued as from NetDVMS version 6 5 When you want to view live video use NetGuard EVS or Ocularis Client Lite Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard EVS have features for viewing live video which are far superior to those previously available in the Monitor application Orip NetGuard EVS is automatically installed on the surveillance system server as part of the NetDVMS installation Grip The Monitor application also included the so called Viewer application for browsing recorded video The Viewer is still available although we recommend NetGuard EVS for browsing recorded video If you want to use the Viewer access it from Windows Start menu Select Start gt All Programs gt NetDVMS gt Viewer Recording Server Service Using the Recording Server Manager The Recording Server service is a vita
315. t In NetDVMS your main entry point for configuration of input event and output handling is the Administrator window e By clicking the Administrator window s I O Setup button you open the O Setup window in which you are able to specify each individual input event VMD event and output e By clicking the Administrator window s Event Buttons button you open the Event Buttons window in which you are able to specify event buttons for manually triggering events controlled activity e By clicking the Administrator window s Generic Events button you open the Generic Events window in which you are able to specify generic events e By clicking the Administrator window s I O Control button you open the O Control window in which you are able to associate specific events with specific output This way you can for example specify that when motion is detected on a camera typically specified as a VMD event a siren should 103 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output automatically sound output If you want users to be able to manually activate output when operating specific cameras you specify this in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Note Before you specify use of external input and output units on a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via
316. t at the same time overwrite the value in the Max number of clients field with the required value Grip To allow an unlimited number of simultaneously connected access clients type O zero in the Max number of clients field Note A four minute session timeout period applies for access client sessions on the Image Server In many cases access client users may not notice this at all However the session timeout period will be very evident in some cases for example if you set the Max number of clients value to 1 When this is the case and the single allowed access client user logs out four minutes must pass before it will be possible to log in again User Administration Section Accounts and rights for access client users are configured in the Image Server Administrator window s User Administration section Access client users must be defined in this section in order to be able to log in to the surveillance system Defining Users To define access client users click the User Setup button This will open the User administration window in which you define users Defining User Access Rights Once you have defined users you are able to define whether all users should have access to all features in their access clients including all available cameras or whether access should be restricted on an individual user basis Full Access for All Users To give all users access to all features and all available cameras select Full access for
317. t case scenarios Automatic Response if Running Out of Disk Space With archiving NetDVMS can automatically respond to the threat of running out of disk space Two scenarios can occur depending on whether the camera database drive is different from or identical to the archiving drive Different Drives Automatic Archiving if Database Drive Runs Out of Disk Space In case the NetDVMS server is running out of disk space and o the archiving drive is different from the camera database drive and o archiving has not taken place within the last hour archiving will automatically begin in an attempt to free up disk space This will happen regardless of any archiving schedules but will of course only apply for cameras for which archiving has been enabled in the Archive Setup window The server is considered to be running out of disk space if o there is less than 10 disk space left and the available disk space goes below 30 GB plus 1 5 GB per camera OF o the available disk space goes below 150 MB plus 20 MB per camera example with ten cameras the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space went below 350 MB 150 MB plus 20 MB for each of the ten cameras The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running out of disk space just because they have less than 10 disk space left On the archiving drive NetDVMS automatically checks that the space requir
318. t check box if a user name and password is required to use the SMTP server e Username Field available only when Server requires login is selected Type the user name required for using the SMTP server e Password Field available only when Server requires login is selected Type the password required for using the SMTP server Specifying Default Subject and Message Texts Specify default subject and message texts in the following fields e Subject text Specify required subject text for e mail alerts 86 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output e Message text Specify required message text for e mail alerts Note that camera information as well as date and time information is automatically included in e mail alerts Note If e mail alerts are enabled for the Viewer the content you specify in the Subject text and Message text fields will appear as default values in the Viewer s dialog for sending evidence via e mail Users will be able to overwrite these default values Specifying mage and Interval Options You are able to specify whether e mail alerts should include images and how much time should pass between alerts per camera e Include Image Select check box to include images in e mail alerts When selected a JPG image from the time the triggering event occurred will be attached to each alert e mail e Time btw motion related mails minutes Specify required minimum time i
319. t positions on event 104 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Once you have defined input events VMD events and outputs you are able to associate specific input events or VMD events with specific outputs in the O Control window so that for example lights are switched on when a door is opened or when motion is detected on a camera Outputs may also be triggered by motion detection on a specific camera even without a defined VMD event or manually through NetGuard EVS or Ocularis Client Lite these are configured in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Lect Saip a A F a a T ma 1 Berge Fou upp eager P la m ed ee ee fe ees had eel he tee rr piyay Deer dear The I O Setup window Access You access the 1 0 Setup window by clicking the I O Setup button in the Administrator window Note Before you specify inputs and outputs for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are Supported for the device and firmware used I O Setup Window s Defined Events List and Buttons The I O Setup window features a Defined events list in which input output and VMD Video Motion Detection events defined for each device are listed
320. t the features you want to remove 3 Click OK You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the selected features If you are sure click the Yes button You can remove installation files for non required features from the surveillance system server This can help you save disk space on the server if you know that your organization is not going to use certain features typically non relevant language versions See Removing Installation files for End User Features for more information Virus Scanning Information If you are using virus scanning software on the NetDVMS server it is likely that the virus scanning will use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning data from the Download Manager If allowed in your organization disable virus scanning on all or parts of the NetDVMS server For more information see Virus Scanning Information General Settings The General Settings window lets you manage a variety of settings such as user rights e mail and SMS settings logging etc 80 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output access To access the General Settings window click the General Settings button in the Administrator window The General Settings window is divided into a number of sections Administrator Settings The Administrator Settings section lets you password protect access to the Administrator application When the Enable Protection check box is selec
321. t up in the SMS settings window When ready click OK This will return you to the Event buttons window 4 Inthe Event Buttons window your newly defined event button is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of camera or other device to see the listing 241 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to Wee rv Mariig rl erei ii ra r Click OK to close the Event Buttons window and return to the Administrator window The defined event button will now be available in the NetGuard EVS as described in the beginning of this text Note that individual users rights may them from accessing specific cameras and or events in NetGuard EVS such rights are defined through the mage Server Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the event button will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc Several types of events exist see About Input Events amp Output In the following you will see how to define events based on input received from external input units such as sensors attached to doors windows etc connected to cameras or other devices on a NetDVMS sy
322. tGuard EVS for manually triggering events 27 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Button Description Generic Opens the Generic Events window in which you are able to define Events events based on input from external sources using the TCP and UDP protocols I O Control Opens the O Control window in which you are able to attach outputs to input events This way you can for example define that a siren should sound when a sensor detects that a door is opened Exit Closes the Administrator application Grip Clicking the icon in the left corner of the Administrator window s title bar gives you access to a small menu Selecting About Adm from the menu will display a dialog with your system s version number and software license code this is valuable information should you ever need to contact product support 28 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Devices amp DLKs You must have a Device License Key DLK for every device IP network camera or IP video server installed on your NetDVMS surveillance system Remember that you are allowed to install and use only the number of cameras listed on your organization s license sheet regardless of you number of available DLKs For example a fully used four port video encoder counts as four cameras even though the cameras are connected through a single device theref
323. ted users must supply the administrator password in order to be able to access the Administrator application and in order to be able to use any of the features to which access has been restricted Changing the Administrator Password To change the administrator password click the Change Password button to open the Change Password window When an administrator password is in use users accessing the Administrator application or wishing to use protected features must type the administrator password in the window before access is granted Manual Start Recording Settings In the Manual start recordings settings section you can enable the possible to manually start recording in NetGuard EVS Select the check box Enable manual start recording to enable manually start of recording In the Default duration of manual recording secs field you can specify the number of seconds the recording should last Note that the minimum number of seconds you can specify is 30 The Maximum duration of manual recording secs field is reserved for future usage NetCentral Settings The NetCentral section lets you enable and configure access to the surveillance system from an OnSSI event server in order to retrieve status information and alarms The default setting is that Enable NetCentral connections check box is selected Patrolling Settings Note Settings in this section are relevant only if you are using PTZ cameras for which patrolling
324. ted to the right of the list The selected output is moved up one step each time you click the up button Likewise each time you click the down button the selected output is moved down one step To remove an output from the On Manual Control list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list Selecting Output for Use on Motion Detection You are able to select outputs to be triggered automatically when motion is detected in video from the camera Grip This feature does not require that a VMD Video Motion Detection event has been defined for the camera in the I O Setup window To select an output for use when motion is detected in video from the camera 1 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Orip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 2 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list To remove an output from the On Motion Detected list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list Tip See also About Input Events Output
325. the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Check the E mail box when you want to set or clear periods with motion or database related e mail alerts for the selected camera Such alerts can automatically be sent to one or more recipients when motion or database events are detected Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Check the SMS box when you want to set or clear periods with motion or database related SMS mobile phone text message alerts for the selected camera Such alerts can automatically be sent to one or more recipients when motion or database events are detected Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window Check the Patrolling box when you want to set or clear periods with patrolling for a selected PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera 168 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Box Start event Stop event Patrol scheme Note The Patrolling box is only available if you have selected a PTZ camera for which at least one patrol scheme has been set up When you set an Online period you will be asked whether you want the selected camera to transfer video to the NetDVMS software continuously within the specified period Always or only when an event occurs within the specified period On Event If
326. the Download Manager When you have installed new features such as NetGuard EVS language versions language packs etc they will by default be selected in the Download Manager and thus immediately be available to users via the welcome page You can always show or hide features on the welcome page by selecting or clearing check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure Grip You can change the sequence in which features and languages are displayed on the welcome page In the Download manager s tree structure simply drag items and drop them at the required position Hiding and Removing Features You can remove features in several ways You can hide features from the welcome page by clearing check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure In that case the features will still be installed on the surveillance system server and by selecting check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure you can quickly make the features available again You can remove features which have previously been made available through the Download Manager This will remove the installation of the features on the surveillance system server The features will disappear from the Download Manager but installation files for the features will be kept in the surveillance system server s Installers folder so you can re install them later if required 1 Inthe Download Manager click the Remove features button 2 Inthe Remove Features window selec
327. the following destination C 1videodatalArchives100408c51e181 212008 06 01 23 15 If the device to which the camera is attached is not a video encoder device with several channels the video encoder channel indication in the subdirectory named after the device s MAC address will always be 1 Example 00408c51le181_1 Dynamic Archiving Dynamic archiving is ideal if you wish to archive to several drives during the same archiving process but do not want to worry about how much space is used on each drive Dynamic archiving is only possible when you select the Automatic path selection check box When you select Automatic path selection you will be able to specify archiving locations for all selected cameras in one go In the Select drives for dynamic archives section simply select the box next to each drive required as archives y E canas E pe iha ad Pe ree A l Ay D esth s se ee EJ jEr Emirate Cares 1 7 Eran Arey Camera i Yi wurvedDlaace Eire 1 CATE 4 O Uber chow soe LPS F s 7 Fl Wet Erne Cancers Note that it is only possible to select drives you cannot edit the paths An Archives directory will automatically be created in each drive and the archiving will take place the same way as described previously under Specifying that Archiving Should Apply for Specific Cameras If you need to use a path for archiving that is not in the list click the Add target button which is described previously What
328. the selected camera you are able to trigger the output from the NetPDA NetCell Client To trigger an output select the required output in the Sel output list Sel output Returning to the Camera List Page To return to the camera list page tap the Return icon El The Return icon is only available when using regular view Viewing Recorded Video From the NetPDA NetCell Client s camera list page you have access to viewing recorded video Camera list page 196 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Clients Selecting a Camera for Viewing of Recordings In the camera list select the required camera Tap the PLAYBACK button You are now able to browse recorded video from the selected camera Pami 1 Camera 1 E E rE adas a 1 sg LLE f o m f f LTI Browsing and Playing Back Recorded Video To browse recorded video tap the Browse buttons The Browse buttons work just as you are used to from NetDVMS s other client applications From left to right they are Move to first image in camera s database Move to previous sequence Move to previous image Move to next image Move to next sequence Move to last image in camera s database When you have browsed to the point in time you want to view recordings from use the Playback buttons From left to right the Playback buttons are Play backward in time Stop Play forward in time To control the playback speed use the Playback Speed
329. the term Sunday Lets you add an end parenthesis to the Event message include field Lets you add an AND operator to the Event message include field With an AND operator you specify that the terms on both sides of the AND operator must be present Example User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday In the above example the term User001 as well as the term Door053 as well as the term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be met It is not enough for only one or two of the terms to be present As a rule of thumb the more terms you combine with AND the fewer results you will retrieve 134 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Field Description Button OR Remove A DoorO053 UscrOol Example Few results match the criterion User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday Lets you add an OR operator to the Event message include field With an OR operator you specify that either one or another term must be present Example User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday In the above example the term User001 or the term Door053 or the term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be met The criterion is satisfied even if only one of the terms is present As a rule of thumb the more terms you combine with OR the more results you will retrieve A A do r U33 JUNO oF Example Many results match the criterion User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday Lets you remove the ite
330. then use Telnet to send a small amount of data which will trigger the generic event and in turn the event notification what is Telnet Telnet is a terminal emulation program used on TCP IP networks With Telnet you can connect to a server from a computer on the network and execute commands through Telnet as If you were entering them directly on the server Windows includes a client for use with Telnet For this example we have created a generic event called Video Our generic event simply specifies that if the term video appears in a received TCP data package the generic event should be triggered Your generic event may be different but you can still use the principles outlined in the following 1 Inthe Administrator window first select a camera from which you are able to view video in a NetGuard NetGuard EVS then click the Settings button This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 2 Inthe Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Event Notifications button Canis GTi fot Sr Cees a 1 E KELE HI LE IM Barger h eee pa Po e Ds eee os la Poe ee EH 1 D1 eee be eee ee a deg E Las h ea Fe aie aires hed A peer es bri id ph a pe rral r OL eres er A Ire gerig Cal i mBan ie rep ppn r Ay ae dr Cir ers epa Le PET i Cambra 7 IOo ss jr pol Hr e red Fahri Dees Calar ee r ME FEO PO AA Ha Deegan A dal alar dea Boe a dba a bl 0 o ila ea el a ll ci e F
331. ting motion on a particular camera VMD simply means Video Motion Detection Once the VMD event is defined you will be able to select it when further configuring NetDVMS Note In addition to NetDVMS s motion detection some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion configured in the devices own software typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address Events based on motion detected on a device itself are not VMD Events they are input events since they are based on input from the device Note Your motion detection settings for the camera in question will entirely determine when motion is detected and thus when the VMD event will occur See the description of the Adjust Motion Detection window for more information Also note that in order not to generate an excessively high number of VMD events during periods with lots of motion a VMD event cannot occur more frequently than every five seconds To add a VMD event do the following 1 Inthe Administrator window click the I O Setup button This will open the I O Setup window 2 In the I O Setup window first select the device on which motion must be detected in order for the event to occur then click the Add VMD Event Motion Detection button iah ee eel dedo rs aU ren j A A hara el This will automatically add a VMD event to the selected device unless the selected device is a video encoder see below
332. ting system options e ID specifies the boot entry ID in the OS Load Options section of the boot ini file to add the operating system options to The boot entry ID number can be obtained by performing the command BOOTCFG QUERY this displays the contents of the boot ini file at the command prompt A reboot is required after editing the boot ini file for the changes to take effect Removing the 3 GB Switch If you want to undo the 3 GB switch mentioned above follow this procedure Select Start gt Control Panel and double click the System icon Select the Advanced tab and click the Settings button in the Startup and Recovery section Click the Edit button in the System Startup section The boot ini file will launch in an editor Remove the 3GB from the end of the appropriate boot entry line under the operating systems section Save and close the file Click OK in the Startup and Recovery section A reboot is required after editing the boot ini file for the changes to take effect What to Do If Running Windows 2008 Server or Windows Vista IMPORTANT mproper modification of the operating system boot entry can render the operating system inoperable OnSSI does not assume any responsibility for changes you make to the operating system Adding the 3 GB Switch Select Start gt All Programs gt Accessories right click Command Prompt and select Run as administrator then click Continue 221 On Net Surveillance Systems
333. tion contains the following fields and buttons e Enable Fisheye Select check box to enable the use of fisheye a technology that allows viewing of 360 degree panoramic images through an advanced lens on the particular camera e Fisheye Settings Opens the Fisheye Camera Configuration window tn which you configure the camera s fisheye functionality Motion Detection Settings The Motion Detection Settings section contains two buttons for configuring the camera s motion detection e Motion Detection Opens the Adjust Motion Detection window in which you are able to specify motion detection sensitivity levels e Exclude Regions Opens the Define Exclusion Regions window in which you are able to disable motion detection in specific areas of the camera s images Disabling motion detection in certain areas may help you avoid detection of irrelevant motion for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background Database Settings The database for each camera is capable of containing a maximum of 600 000 records or 40 GB per day Note that camera databases also store recorded audio from associated audio sources see Important Information about Using Audio for more information Crip By using archiving it is possible to store recordings beyond the capabilities of the camera s database The Database settings section lets you specify where the database containin
334. tions only You are able to store recordings from periods preceding and following detected motion and or specified events Using such a pre post buffer can be advantageous If for example you have defined that video should be stored when a door is opened being able to see what happened immediately prior to the door being opened may be important Specify the number of seconds for which you want to store video from before and after the storage conditions are met Example You have specified that video should be stored conditionally on event with a start event called Door Opened and a stop event called Door Closed With a pre post buffer of three seconds video will be stored from three seconds before Door Opened occurs to three seconds after Door Closed occurs Note Pre post recording periods cannot be displayed in the timelines of NetGuard EVS s timeline browser The fact that these periods cannot be displayed in the timeline browser s timelines does not affect recording Live Settings The Live settings section lets you determine the frame rate with which users will view live video in their access clients Select either Same as recording or Same as speedup Note This section is not available for cameras using MPEG For MPEG viewing of live video will take place with the same frame rate as specified for speedup Audio In the Audio section you are able to associate a microphone and or a speaker with the selected camera Note
335. ton will open the Multiple Input Events window in which you define which of the device s possible input events should be enabled and whether any alerts should be associated with enabled input events Timer Events When you click the plus sign next to the device in the Defined events list and select a defined input event the Add new event button becomes available for defining timer events When clicked the button will open the New Timer window in which you are able to specify the settings for timer events Timer events are separate events triggered by the input event under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the input event under which they are defined Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only e A camera starts based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the camera after 15 seconds e Acamera starts and the lights are switched on based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the camera after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes Opens the Add New Output window in which you are able to specify a name for the required output which of the device s output ports to use and how long to keep the output for Lets you add a VMD Video Motion Detection event to the device selected in the Defined Events list VMD events are events trigg
336. tput occur By default SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is used when sending e mail alerts Compared with other mail transfer methods SMTP has the advantage that you will avoid automatically triggered warnings from your e mail client when an e mail alert is to be sent Such automatically triggered warnings may otherwise inform you that your e mail client is trying to automatically send e mail messages on your behalf Access To access the E Mail setup window click the Email Settings button in the Genera Settings window Enabling E Mail Alerts You enable the use of e mail alerts separately for the Recording Server and if applicable the Viewer application Note When enabling e mail alerts also consider the e mail alert schedules configured for each camera in the Camera Alert Scheduler window Enable E Mail Recording Server Select check box to enable the use of e mail alerts when the Recording Server is running E mail alerts will then be sent when the following conditions apply 85 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output e the Recording Server is running e motion is detected or an event for which the sending of an e mail alert has been defined occurs e motion is detected within a period of time for which an e mail alert schedule has been defined Enable E Mail Viewer Select check box to enable the use of e mail alerts in the Viewer application In effect
337. tput To copy an existing patrol scheme select the required patrol scheme in the Patrol scheme list and click the Copy button This will add a copy of the selected patrol scheme to the list The copy will initially be named Copy of Patrol Scheme Name To change the name to a name of your choice select the Copy of Patrol Scheme Name listing and click the Rename button Renaming an Existing Patrol Scheme To change the name of an existing patrol scheme select the required patrol scheme in the Patrol scheme list and click the Rename button Removing an Existing Patrol Scheme To remove an existing patrol scheme select the required patrol scheme in the Patrol scheme list and click the Remove button Note The selected patrol scheme will be removed from the list without further warning Selecting Preset Positions to Be Used for a PTZ Patrol Scheme Having selected a patrolling scheme in the Patrol scheme list you are able to specify which of the PTZ camera s preset positions should be used for the selected patrolling scheme 1 In the Preset Positions list select the names of the preset positions you want to use A preset position can be used more than once in a patrol scheme for example if the preset position covers an especially important location Grip By pressing the CTRL or SHIFT buttons on your keyboard while selecting from the Preset Positions list you are able to select several or all of list s preset positions in on
338. trator and recording server log files are stored in the folder containing the NetDVMS software To specify another location for your log files type the path to the required folder in the Logfile Path field or click the browse button next to the field to browse to the required folder Days to Log A new log file is created every day A log file older than the number of days specified in the Days to log field is automatically deleted By default the log file will be stored for five days To specify another number of days simply overwrite the value in the Days to log field The current day s activity is always logged even with a value of O in the Days to log field The maximum number of days to log is 9999 Grip Read more about NetDVMS logging in About Logging Event Recording Settings As opposed to the general log files which contain information about activity on the surveillance system itself event log files contain information about registered events for more information about events see About Input Events Output The Event Recording Settings section lets you specify where to keep event log files and for how long Event log files should be viewed using NetGuard EVS or Viewer e NetGuard EVS In the Browse tab s Alerts section select the required event then click the Get List button to see when the event in question was detected e Viewer Select the Viewer s Alarm Overview control panel then click the Events bu
339. triggered video can appear in a NetMatrix recipient e Another user wants to share important video and sends it to the required NetMatrix recipient from a NetGuard EVS or from a custom made web page e Video is sent to the required NetMatrix recipient automatically when a predefined event occurs The Event tab is used for configuring the automatic sending of live video based on predefined events it lets you define exactly which events and cameras to use You define this on a per NetMatrix recipient basis To define what should happen on which NetMatrix recipient when an event occurs do the following 246 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to 1 Select the required NetMatrix recipient 2 Right click the NetMatrix recipient to select the required event Gel Alen Cantal Danla Esc Door Ext ir Back Door West Wing F p b Motion on Back Door West Wing Corera Executed OF Can p CATETE In this example the selected event is detected motion on a particular camera Note that if available you are also able to select other types of event including input events generic events VMD events event buttons including global event buttons and timer events When you select an event it will initially be highlighted by a red exclamation mark Ga Alam Ciria Orph The exclamation mark indicates that there is additional configuration to be done 3 Now right click the event to select whi
340. ts for Camera section s Defined Cameras list select each camera to which the user group should have access in the access client Grip By pressing the CTRL or SHIFT buttons on your keyboard while selecting cameras in the Defined Cameras list you are able to select several or all of the listed cameras in one go 4 Click the gt gt button to move the selected cameras to the Viewable by selected user list 5 For each camera now listed in the Viewable by selected user list specify the features to which the user group should have access by selecting the features in the User Rights for the Selected Camera section Note that the features are listed in two columns the left column lists features related to live viewing the right column lists features related to browsing existing recordings In the Live column the following features all selected by default are available e Live Ability to view live video from the selected camera e PTZ Ability to use navigation features for PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras A user group will only be able to use this right if having access to one or more PTZ cameras e PTZ Preset Positions Ability to use navigation features for moving a PTZ camera to particular preset positions A user group will only be able to use this right if having access to one or more PTZ cameras with defined preset positions e Outputs Ability to trigger outputs e g switching on lights sounding sirens or similar if such outputs
341. ts without prior notification C 2009 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI and the Eye logo are registered trademarks of OnSSI Ocularis NetDVMS NetEVS NetDVR ProSight NetGuard NetGuard EVS NetSwitcher NetMatrix NetTransact NetCentral NetPDA and NetCell are trademarks of OnSSI Other names are the property of their respective owners On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Welcome Welcome NetDVMS is a powerful and intelligent surveillance solution Compatible with a wide range of different IP video products from the leading manufacturers so you choose the hardware you want in combinations too Dependable with robust and stable performance proven in operation on thousands of cameras worldwide Flexible with remote access features that let you use the surveillance system from any place and at any time Scalable with open architecture based on IP technology with ongoing development and regular updates which gives you long term returns on your surveillance investment Future safe the IP network approach is the foundation for tomorrow available today Several Targeted Components in One NetDVMS consists of a number of components each targeted at specific tasks and user types The Administrator The main application used by surveillance system administrators for configuring the NetDVMS surveillance system server upon installation or whenever configuration adjustments are required e g
342. tton Click the Administrator window s Event Buttons button to open the Event Buttons window In the Event Buttons window s Defined Events list select the required event button then click the Add new event button to open the New Timer window e If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Generic Event Click the Administrator window s Generic Events button to open the Generic Events window In the Generic Events window s Defined Events list select the required generic event then click the Add new event button to open the New Timer window In the New Timer window the Timer event is started by field will show the name of the selected event or event button Heras Timar EJ T ah vend if iaj iy Beer uiy N T ah eve Fiat Tra meri cure aber I 0d H rih Cancel 237 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual How to Now specify information in the following fields e Timer event name Specify a name for the timer event Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp e Timer event occurs after Specify the amount of time that should pass between the event occurring event button being clicked and the timer event in either seconds or minutes When ready click OK 3 Inthe window from which you opened the New Timer window your newly defined timer event will now be listed O tat Timer event in this example associated with a VMD event listed
343. tton to view the events log Path By default event log files are stored in the folder containing the NetDVMS software 82 NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output On Net Surveillance Systems Inc To specify another location for your log files type the path to the required folder in the Path field or click the browse button next to the field to browse to the required folder Days to Keep A new event log file is created every day Event log files older than the number of days specified in the Days to keep field are automatically deleted By default event log files will be stored for five days To specify another number of days simply overwrite the value in the Days to keep field The current day s activity is always logged even with a value of O in the Days to keep field The maximum number of days to log is 9999 Grip Read more about NetDVMS logging in About Logging Advanced The Advanced section lets you specify a number of additional settings Check Box Description Don t send If selected no e mail alerts will be sent if NetDVMS loses contact e mail on with a camera camera failures Otherwise e mail alerts will provided the e mail alert feature has been enabled in the E Mail setup window automatically be sent if NetDVMS loses contact with a camera regardless of any e mail alerts periods defined in the Camera Alert Scheduler window Don t send SMS on camera failures Start cameras on
344. tup of PTZ Scanning section lets you enable PTZ scanning and select a PTZ scanning speed Quality Resolution etc Note Settings in the Configure Device window are to a large extent camera specific The window s contents will therefore vary from camera to camera descriptions in the following are thus for guidance only The Configure Device window lets you specify image quality settings such as compression resolution etc for a specific camera 63 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output a CES peal Ci ea Retales TE 14 fated bajo Hay Linn f Ho Laan Les Hur Copas Los J Mur E amp dag a Hire tada ns ee TE a de fi fate oy i ike Example of the Configure Device window with a preview image JAccess You access the Configure Device window by clicking the Image Quality button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window The Configure Device window is divided into a Camera Settings section and a preview image section Camera Settings Section The Camera Settings section will typically contain controls for compression bandwidth resolution color contrast brightness image rotation and similar Include Date and Time in Image The Camera Settings section may feature an Include Date and Time in Image check box When selected date and time from the camera will be included in images from the camera Note As cameras are separate units whic
345. u define access rights for access client users dAccess You access the Define User Rights window by clicking the User Access button in the Image Server Administrator window The button is only available if you have selected the Image Server Administrator window s Restrict user access option button Prerequisites Before you define user rights you should define users You do this by clicking the Image Server Administrator window s User Setup button To define access rights for a particular user do the following in the Define User Rights window 1 Inthe User list select the required user or group 2 Inthe Global User Rights section select the user s group s global i e non camera specific rights e View Live Ability to view the Live tab mode in NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS If a user group does not have this right the Live tab mode will not be selectable in the OnSSI client e Browse Ability to Browse in NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS Ifa user group does not have this right the Browse tab mode will not be selectable in the OnSSI client e Setup Ability to view perform Setup functions in NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS If a user group does not have this right the Setup function will not be available in the OnSSI client e Edit Shared Views Ability to create and edit views in shared groups in the OnSSI client Views placed in shared groups can be accessed by every NetGuar
346. uired unit per Second per Minute or per Hour from the list The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified in the Required framerate field in the Recording settings section which is described in the following Grip When you specify a frame rate the interval between images is automatically calculated and displayed to the right of the frame rate fields Specifically for cameras using MPEG For MPEG cameras you can select predefined frame rates and it is not possible to select unit The number of seconds between each image is still calculated Recording Settings The Recording Settings section lets you specify the camera s recording settings in the following fields e Required framerate Specify required number of frames in the first field and select required unit per Second per Minute or per Hour from the list Grip When you specify a frame rate the interval between images is automatically 38 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output calculated and displayed to the right of the frame rate fields Specifically for cameras using MPEG Instead of selecting the required frame rate you can select a Frame Type Select All to record everything this is similar to having the same frame rate for speedup and for recording Select Key frame if you wish only to record key frames and ignore changes between the key frames this means that you typically record one frame per second
347. ure the use of e mail alerts Sms Settings Clicking the Sms Settings button opens the SMS settings window in which you enable and configure the use of SMS mobile phone text message alerts Note Use of the SMS alert feature requires that an external Siemens TC 35 GSM modem has been attached to a serial port on the computer running the NetDVMS software Change Password Window The Change Password window lets you change the administrator password for your NetDVMS solution Charge Parrecrd E AE Nra paa Hi rad dr access To access the Change Password window click the Change Password button in the General Settings window How to Change the Administrator Password To change the administrator password do the following 1 Specify the current administrator password in the Old password field 2 Specify the new administrator password in the New password field 3 Repeat the new administrator password in the New password confirm field 4 Click OK 84 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output NetCentral Settings Window Note Settings in the NetCentral Settings window are relevant only if you are using the NetCentral add on product in connection with NetDVMS The NetCentral Settings window lets you specify the login settings required for an NetCentral server to access the surveillance system in order to retrieve status information and alarms Access To access the NetCe
348. using On Event the Start event list lets you select the required start event Note The use of event based online periods requires that events have been defined Read more about events in About input Events amp Output When you set an Online period you will be asked whether you want the selected camera to transfer video to the NetDVMS software continuously within the specified period Always or only when an event occurs within the specified period On Event If using On Event the Stop event list lets you select the required stop event Note The use of event based online periods requires that events have been defined Read more about events in About input Events amp Output When you set a Patrolling period for a PTZ camera with patrolling the Patrol scheme list lets you select the required patrol scheme Note The Patrol scheme list is only available if you have selected a PTZ camera for which at least one patrol scheme has been set up 169 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Calendar Section The Camera Alert Scheduler window s calendar section lets you specify exact periods of time for each option for each camera selected in the window s Camera list Set and Clear Modes Depending on your selection in the Mode list you Set or Clear periods in the calendar Your selection is indicated by your mouse pointer turning into either a pencil Set or an eraser Clear
349. ut has been defined on other cameras devices on the NetDVMS system this output will also be selectable in the All Outputs list e An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way e If you have specified several outputs in the On Manual Control list you are able to control the sequence in which the outputs will be displayed in the OnSSI client By using the up and down buttons located to the right of the list you can change a selected output s position in the sequence e The Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window also lets you select output for automatic triggering on detected motion This is further described in How to Add a Motion Triggered Output 8 When ready click the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window s Exit button to return to the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 9 Inthe Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click OK to return to the Administrator window 10 Close the Administrator The defined output will now be available in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS as described in the beginning of this text Note that individual users rights may prevent them from accessing specific cameras and or output in NetGuard and NetGuard EVS such rights are defined through the mage Server Administrator window Output e g lights sirens etc connected to cameras or other devices can be triggered automatically when motion is detected by a camera The out
350. ut using the keyboard shortcuts is available in the documentation for NetGuard EVS Editing Settings for Audio Sources To edit the settings for an audio source i e a microphone or a speaker listed in the Device Manager section click the plus sign next to the device to which the audio source is attached select the required audio source then click the Settings button to open the Microphone Settings window or the Speaker Settings window Ae Lab Audio 10 10 50 29 e Camera 1 A tudol IMPORTANT The use of microphones will impact the database capacity for storing video see Important Information about Using Audio for more information Disabling Enabling Cameras and Audio Sources Individual cameras and audio sources listed in the Device Manager section are by default enabled meaning that video from cameras and audio from attached audio sources is by default transferred to NetDVMS provided that the cameras are marked as online in the Camera Alert Scheduler window also default Note On some devices audio can also be enabled disabled on the device itself typically through the device s own configuration web page If audio on a device does not work after enabling it in the Administrator application you should thus verify whether the problem may be due to audio being disabled on the device itself 24 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output If required you can disable indiv
351. uts list When the selected event occurs or when the selected event button is clicked the selected output will be triggered You are able to associate an event or an event button with more than one output Simply repeat the process for each required output To remove an output from the Selected Outputs list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located below the Selected Outputs list 137 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window In the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window you are able to associate a camera with particular external outputs defined in the O Setup window for example the sounding of a siren or the switching on of lights The associated outputs can be triggered automatically when motion is detected as well as manually through output buttons available in NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard EVS hat paa erties far Jaca Creda 1 ca Bl hipi Din banal ores ee ee ee i a JAccess You access the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window from the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window by clicking the Outputs button Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected Motion Note Use of features in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window requires that output has been defined in the O Setup window You ha
352. ve a high degree of flexibility when associating a camera with particular outputs e You are able to select between all available outputs i e outputs defined as output events for the camera itself as well as outputs defined as output events for other devices on the NetDVMS system e The same output may be used for manual control as well as for automatic triggering when motion is detected Selecting Output for Manual Control You are able to specify outputs to be triggered manually from a list in NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS To specify an output for manual triggering in an OnSSI client do the following 1 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Orip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 138 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output 2 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way You are able to determine each output s position in NetGuard s and NetGuard EVS s output list by moving the selected output up or down in the On Manual Control list with the up and down buttons loca
353. ve been set up in the SMS settings window Edit Event Window The Edit Event window for editing input events lets you edit the settings for an existing input event on devices capable of handling one input event only Tie WE Lera uran pore ied lo Eei Comer AA f ra A A pra Dil SE d Pai er ca 109 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output The Edit Event window for editing input events 3 Access You access the Edit Event window for editing input events by selecting the required device and clicking the Edit selected button in the I O Setup window Note that this only applies when the selected device is capable of handling a single input event only Some devices are capable of handling several input events in which case a different window the Multiple Input Events window will open when the Edit selected button is clicked Edit Event Window s Fields The Edit Event window for editing input events contains the following fields External Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the sensor input event is defined connected to Sensor Lets you select which of the device s input ports the sensor used for connected the input event should be connected to through Event Lets you select whether the input event should be triggered when occurs the signal on the input sensor rises or falls Be meee e Low Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is
354. ver Log File Administrator Help About Exit Recording Server Manager 163 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output e The icon in the notification area changes to red He Opening the NetDVMS Application To open the Administrator application do the following e Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon e Inthe menu that appears select Open Administrator Monitoring System Status By right clicking the notification area s Recording Server icon and then selecting Show System Status you get access to the Status window Grip Alternatively simply double click the icon to open the Status window The Status window lets you view the status of the image server s and connected cameras The status of each server camera is indicated by a color e Green indicates that the server or camera is running correctly e Gray indicates that the camera not the server is not running Typically a camera will be indicated by gray in the following situations o the camera has been set offline in the Camera Alert Scheduler window o the Recording Server service has been paused from the Service Manager window o the Recording Server service has been stopped e Red indicates that the server or camera is not running This may because it has been unplugged or due to a network or hardware error Errors are listed in the Recording Server log file see the following Place your
355. ver through an Internet Explorer browser The extra feature rich Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS should always be downloaded and installed on remote users computers On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Welcome e The NetPDA NetCell Client and NetPDA NetCell Server Enable remote access to the surveillance system via a PDA Personal Digital Assistant a hand held computer device with a wireless connection e NetMatrix Enables control of live camera views on remote computers for distributed viewing Once configured NetMatrix triggered live video can be viewed in NetGuard EVS Ocularis Client Lite or on computers with the NetMatrix Monitor client application installed To use NetDVMS s built in help system simply press the F1 key on your keyboard while using NetDVMS When you press F1 the help system will open in a separate window allowing you to easily switch between help and NetDVMS itself The help system in is context sensitive This means that when you press F1 for help while working in a particular NetDVMS window the help system automatically displays the help topic describing that window Navigating the Built in Help System Even though the help system initially takes you to a topic describing the window you are working in you are always able to freely navigate between the help system s contents To do this simply use the help window s three tabs Contents Search and Glossary or use the links i
356. via e mail e Port 80 inbound and outbound Used for HTTP traffic between the surveillance server and cameras NetGuard and or NetGuard EVS and the default communication port for the surveillance system s Image Server HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol is a standard for exchanging files across networks widely used for formatting and transmission of data on the world wide web e Port 1024 and above outbound only Used for HTTP traffic between cameras and the surveillance server e Any other port numbers you may have selected to use for example if you have changed the Image Server s port from its default port number 80 to another port number Grip Consult the administrator of your organization s firewall if in doubt about how to open ports for traffic 16 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual System Requirements All images are time stamped by NetDVMS upon reception but since cameras are separate units which may have separate timing devices power supplies etc camera time and NetDVMS system time may not correspond fully and this may occasionally lead to confusion If supported by your cameras we thus recommend you auto synchronize camera and system time through a time server for consistent synchronization For information about configuring a time server searching www microsoft com for time server time service or similar 17 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Installation
357. w for PTZ Preset Positions on Event Available only when dealing with a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera the Event window for preset positions on events lets you associate particular preset positions with particular events timer events or event buttons You are thus able to make the PTZ camera automatically go to a particular preset position when a particular event occurs r Ge IG l J The Event window for preset positions on events JAccess To access the Event window for preset positions on events click the Setup button in Preset Position on Events section of the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window Note To use preset positions on events you must have specified events event or generic events Only one PTZ preset position can be defined per event per camera Associating Preset Positions with Particular Events When associating a preset position from a particular PTZ camera with one or more events you are able to select between all events defined on the NetDVMS system you are not limited to selecting events defined on a particular device To associate a particular preset position with a particular event do the following 1 Select the required preset position in the Available Preset Positions list in the left side of the Event window 2 Select the required event in the list of available events the list in the middle of the window 3 Click the gt gt button located to the rig
358. w Heb aml e DB FRB See gt mo g Internet Information Seraces 34 GOS 72 COMER local com E Agape Poch Web Sbes d Web Service Extensior E Web Serni Extensa Y Al Urknown CH Extension Probibded FO Uno SAP Exterior Pe rebated Aci Ser s Pues A ASP WET 1 1 4 intemet Data Connector Server Sade Includes Probibibed DR Protabated A EA E E do al web serios extensors for a qeli poke Son Lal Y ED Extended A Standard a NET Framework Registration When IIS and NET Framework are installed you must register NET Framework in the IIS 1 In Windows Start menu select Run 2 In the Open field type C WINDOWS Framework v1 1 4322 aspnet_regiis exe i where v1 1 4322 refers to the NET Framework version Note Make sure you have included the i parameter 3 Click OK to register the NET Framework in IIS Orip When IIS and NET Framework have been installed and registered it is a good idea to use Windows Update to check for and download any new service packs or security packs Installing the NetPDA NetCell Server To Install the NetPDA NetCell Server do the following Note The following procedures describe installation of the NetPDA NetCell Server as the only application using IIS on the server and with its default settings If IIS is also used for other applications it is recommended that you consult an experienced IIS administrator prior to installing the Net
359. when adding new cameras or users to the system The Recording Server A vital part of the surveillance system video streams are only transferred to NetDVMS while the recording server is running The recording server is automatically installed as a service the Recording Server service which will run in the background on the NetDVMS surveillance system server You are able to manage the service through the Recording Server Manager The mage Server Handles access to the surveillance system for users logging in with NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard EVS or NetPDA NetCell Client The Image Server itself does not require separate hardware it runs as a service on the surveillance system server Surveillance system administrators handle Image Server configuration including users access rights through the Image Server Administrator application The Download Manager Lets surveillance system administrators manage which NetDVMS related features your organization s users will be able to access from a targeted welcome page on the surveillance system server NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard EVS Choice of three types of remote access clients each providing users with intuitive remote access to the surveillance system NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard EVS let users view live video play back recorded video activate outputs print and export evidence etc NetGuard is accessed straight from the Surveillance system ser
360. when inside the calendar section KA EA Mouse pointer turns into pencil Set or eraser Clear when inside calendar section Zoom Feature When placing your mouse pointer inside the day band in the top part of the calendar section you get access to the calendar s zoom feature With the zoom feature you are able to toggle between the calendar s default seven day view and a single day view The single day view provides you with five minute interval indications allowing you to specify periods precisely Sunday icine E Tuesday Monday 14 05 Calendar s zoom feature allows you to toggle between seven day and single day views How to Set or Clear Periods in the Calendar To set or clear a period in the Camera Alert Scheduler window s calendar section simply click at the required start point in the calendar and drag to set clear a period depending on whether you have selected Set or Clear in the window s Mode list Good to Know when You Set Online Periods When you set an Online period you will be asked whether you want the selected camera to transfer video to the NetDVMS software continuously within the specified period Always or only when an event occurs within the specified period On Event The Online Method window used for specifying at which occasion the camera should be online 170 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output If using On Event remember to sel
361. will be used for the actual package analysis The field is not as such editable 133 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output Button Add AND However you are able to position the cursor inside the field in order to determine where a new item should be included when you click the Add button or one of the parenthesis or operator buttons Likewise you are able to position the cursor inside the field in order to determine where an item should be removed when clicking the Remove button The item immediately to the left of the cursor will be removed when you click the Remove button Adds the content of the Event substring field to the Event message include field See also the description of the Event substring and Event message includes fields Lets you add a start parenthesis to the Event message include field Parentheses can be used to ensure that semantically related terms are processed together as a logical unit in other words they can be used to force a certain processing order in the analysis Example User001 OR Door053 AND Sunday In the example the two OR terms will be processed first then the result will be combined with the last part of the string In other words the system will first look for any packages containing either of the terms User001 or Door053 then it will take the results and run through them in order to see which packages also contain
362. without right original aspect ratio Note how keeping the original aspect ratio often leads to black bars around the video whereas stretching may distort the video slightly Toggling between Regular and Full Screen View To quickly toggle between viewing the NetMatrix Monitor window in full screen or regular view double click anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window Changing the Configuration of a Running NetMatrix Monitor To change the configuration of a running NetMatrix Monitor do the following 1 Open the NetMatrix Monitor window Right click anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window and select Config from the menu that appears Pull Screen w Always On Top Config Hide Weirdo 2 Specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor Ender Pasoind 3 Click OK This will open the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window Each of the window s settings is described in the previous section First Time Configuration 4 Make the required changes and click OK when ready Accepting Received Commands 209 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual NetMatrix Monitor As part of the data exchange between computers on the NetMatrix system other computers exactly which computers are defined as part of your NetMatrix Monitor application s configuration are able to send commands to your NetMatrix Monitor The commands typically tell your NetMatrix Monitor to connect to
363. wn all NetDVMS components 2 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs 3 Inthe Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select the NetDVMS system entry not the NetDVMS entry and click the Change Remove button 4 The setup wizard appears click the Next button then the Remove button 5 Select Remove entire surveillance system then click Next and complete the wizard s remaining steps Grip If you have used the NetPDA NetCell Client NetPDA NetCell Server solution you may also want to remove the NetPDA NetCell Server software from the server Remove Individual Components Upon installation of NetDVMS your surveillance system server by default contains installation files for a number of end user features The installation files lets you install the end user features on the surveillance system server and make them available to your organization s users through the Download Manager You can remove installation files for non required features from the surveillance system server This can help you save disk space on the server if you know that your organization is not going to use certain features for example non relevant language versions 1 Open the Installers folder located in the NetDVMS installation folder 2 Select the required language sub folder then delete the unwanted installation exe files The Download Manager is removed separately from the NetDVMS
364. y to be reached earlier if recording audio and video than if only recording video o Example If using MPEG4 each one second video GOP Group Of Pictures will be stored in one record in the database Each second of audio will also be stored in one record in the database When this is the case the database s video storage capacity will be reduced to a maximum of 300 000 records because half of the database s total maximum of 600 000 records will be used for storing audio o Example If using MJPEG audio is stored in one record for every JPEG for as long as the audio block size does not exceed the time between the JPEGs The database s video storage capacity can thus in extreme cases be reduced to a maximum of 300 000 records because half of the database s total maximum of 600 000 records will be used for storing audio If using very high frame rates where there is less time between each JPEG a smaller portion of the database will be used for storing audio 75 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Input Events amp Output records and consequently a larger portion will be available for storing video Thus a camera database s maximum video storage capacity may in some cases be halved when an associated audio source is enabled Note Above examples are simplified Since databases also have a maximum limit of 40 GB of data the exact available video storage capacity will also depend on GOP J PEG and audio kilobyte
365. ypted part The log file header is not correct This situation is most likely to occur if a user has attempted to delete the beginning of a log file 215 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS 6 5f User Manual Video Device Drivers Video Device Drivers Video drivers are small programs used for controlling communicating with the camera devices connected to an NetDVMS system The Video Device Drivers should therefore be installed on your NetDVMS system Video drivers are installed automatically during the initial installation of your NetDVMS system However new versions of video device drivers also called Driver Packs are released from time to time When updating your system s Video Device Drivers it is recommended that you remove the old version of the drivers before installing the new version IMPORTANT When you remove your NetDVMS system s video device drivers your system will not be able to communicate with camera devices until you have installed the new version of the video device drivers It is therefore highly recommended that you perform the update of your Video Device Drivers at a time when you do not expect important incidents to take place Removing Old Version of Video Device Drivers To remove Video Device Drivers prior to installing a later version of the drivers use the following procedure on the NetDVMS server s on which the Video Device Drivers are installed 1 Open Windows Control Panel and select Add

NetDVMS NVR 6.5f Manual Click Here

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents